CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER

RENOVATION 4030 Old Main Hill, Logan, UT 84322

BID SET SUBMITTAL DIVISIONS 00-12, 22-26

MARCH 2020

USU Project #CP001046 USU Approval Stamp

PROJECT MANUAL

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PROJECT DIRECTORY 00 0102 - 1

SECTION 00 0102 - PROJECT DIRECTORY

OWNER Name: Utah State University Contact: Tom Graham Address: 6550 Old Main Hill, Logan, Utah 84322 Phone: 435.797.3535 Email: tom.graham@usu.edu

ARCHITECT Name: Sparano + Mooney Contact: Seth Striefel Address: 57 West 2100 South, Salt Lake City, Utah 84115 Phone: 801.746.0234 Email: seth@sparanomooney.com

MECHANICAL ENGINEER Name: Van Boerum & Frank Associates Contact: Jed Jenkins Address: 40 West 1250 North, Logan, Utah 84341 Phone: 435.752.5081 Email: jjenkins@vbfa.com

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER Name: Electrical Consulting Engineers Contact: Akbar Matinkhah Address: 939 South West Temple, Salt Lake City, Utah 84101 Phone: 801.521.8007 Email: akbar@eceonline.com

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PROJECT DIRECTORY 00 0102 - 2

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

SEALS PAGE 00 0107 - 1

SECTION 00 0107 - SEALS PAGE

DESIGN PROFESSIONALS OF RECORD

ARCHITECT

Sparano + Mooney Architecture John P. Sparano, AIA 57 West 2100 South Salt Lake City, UT, 84115 801.746.0234

MECHANICAL ENGINEER

Van Boerum & Frank Associates Raymond D. Vernon, PE 40 West 1250 North Logan, Utah 84341 435.752.5081

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER

Electrical Consulting Engineers Akbar Matinkhah, PE 939 South West Temple Salt Lake City, Utah 84101 801.521.8007

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

SEALS PAGE 00 0107 - 2

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 1

SECTION 00 0110 – TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 0101 PROJECT TITLE PAGE 00 0102 PROJECT DIRECTORY 00 0107 SEALS PAGE 00 0110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0115 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 4000 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS (NOT INCLUDED)

Procurement and Contracting Documents to be provided by Owner 00 6000 PROJECT FORMS

Utah State University General Conditions AIA A310 - Bid Bond Form AIA A312 - Performance and Payment Bond Form AIA G810 - Submittal Transmittal Letter Form AIA G703 - Schedule of Values Form AIA G702 with AIA G703 - Application for Payment Forms Architect’s Supplemental Instructions AIA G714 - Construction Change Directive Form Architect’s Proposal Request Change Order Form - To be provided by Owner Certificate of Substantial Completion Form - To be provided by Owner AIA G706A - Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens Form AIA G707 - Consent of Surety to Final Payment Form TC-721G - Utah State Tax Exemption Certificate for Governments and Schools

DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 1000 SUMMARY 01 2000 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

CSI Form 1.5C Substitution Request (During the Bidding Phase) CSI Form 13.1A Substitution Request (After the Bidding Phase)

01 3000 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 3216 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 4000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 5000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5100 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 6000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 7800 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 4100 DEMOLITION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 2

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 1053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 4100 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 8400 FIRESTOPPING

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

08 1113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 4313 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONT AND ENTRANCES 08 7100 DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE 08 8000 GLAZING

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

09 2116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 6500 RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6813 TILE CARPETING 09 9000 PAINTING AND COATING COATING

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

10 4400 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11 3013 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

12 3600 COUNTERTOPS

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 0518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0523 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 0719 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 1116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 1119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1316 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 4000 PLUMBING FIXTURES

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 3

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 0100 MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 0150 TEMPORARY USE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS 23 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 0593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 3001 COMMON DUCT REQUIREMENTS 23 3113 METAL DUCTS 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 2416 PANELBOARDS 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 4

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 0115 - 1

SECTION 00 0115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

GENERAL

G001 COVER SHEET G010 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS G020 GENERAL NOTES

ARCHITECTURAL

AD101 DEMO FLOOR PLAN AE100 EXISTING CONDITION PHOTOGRAPHS AE101 FLOOR PLAN AE102 FINISH FLOOR PLAN AE103 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AE401 SECTIONS AND INTERIOR ELEVATIONS AE500 WALL TYPES AE502 DETAILS AE601 DOOR AND WINDOW TYPES

MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING

M001 MECHANICAL SYMBOLS, LEGEND, AND GENERAL NOTES ME601 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES MH101 MECHANICAL PLANS MH301 MECHANICAL SECTIONS PL101 PLUMBING PLANS

ELECTRICAL

EE001 GENERAL NOTES AND SYMBOLS LEGEND EE002 DETAILS EE003 PANEL SCHEDULES ED101 DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN AND CEILING PLAN EL101 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN - LIGHTING EP101 FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS 00 0115 - 2

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PROJECT FORMS 00 6000 - 1

SECTION 00 6000 - PROJECT FORMS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING A VALID LICENSE TO USE ALL

COPYRIGHTED DOCUMENTS SPECIFIED BUT NOT INCLUDED IN THE PROJECT MANUAL.

1.02 AGREEMENT AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACTA. The Agreement will be provided by the Owner.

B. Utah State University General Conditions.1. Supplementary General Conditions, if any, will be provided by Owner.

1.03 FORMSA. Use the following forms for the specified purposes unless otherwise indicated elsewhere in

Contract Documents.

B. Bond Forms:1. Bid Bond Form: AIA A310.2. Performance and Payment Bond Form: AIA A312.

C. Post-Award Certificates and Other Forms:1. Submittal Transmittal Letter Form: AIA G810.2. Schedule of Values Form: AIA G703.3. Application for Payment Forms: AIA G702 with AIA G703 (for Contractors).

D. Clarification and Modification Forms:1. Architect's Supplemental Instructions Form: Sparano + Mooney Architecture

Supplemental Instructions.2. Construction Change Directive Form: AIA G714.3. Architect's Proposal Request Form: Sparano + Mooney Architecture Proposal Request.4. Change Order Form: Form provided by Owner.

E. Closeout Forms:1. Certificate of Compliance Form: Form provided by Owner.2. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens Form: AIA G706A.3. Consent of Surety to Final Payment Form: AIA G707.

F. Tax Exemption Certificate: TC-721G - Utah State Tax Exemption Certificate for Governments and Schools.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USEDEND OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PROJECT FORMS 00 6000 - 2

USU FORM 052002 1

UTAH STATE UNIVERSITY

G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S

Table of Contents

ARTICLE 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS.

1.1 Basic Definitions. 1.2 Ownership and Use of Consultant's Drawings, Specifications and Other Documents.

ARTICLE 2. OWNER.

2.1 Information and Services Required of the Owner. 2.1.1 Owner's Designated Representative. 2.1.2 Specialists and Inspectors. 2.1.3 Surveys and Legal Description. 2.1.4 Prompt Information and Services. 2.1.5 Copies of Drawings and Project Manuals (For Construction). 2.1.6 Other Duties.

ARTICLE 3. CONTRACTOR

3.1 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor. 3.1.1 Reviewing Contract Documents, Information, Reporting Errors, Inconsistencies

or Omissions. 3.1.2 Field Conditions. 3.1.3 Perform in Accordance with Documents and Submittals. 3.1.4 Performance to Produce the Complete System and Intended Results. 3.1.5 Intent and Hierarchy. 3.1.6 Dividing Work and Contractor Representation. 3.1.7 Planning and Priority.

3.2 Supervision and Construction Procedures. 3.2.1 Supervision and Control. 3.2.2 Responsibility. 3.2.3 Not Relieved of Obligations. 3.2.4 Inspections and Approvals.

3.3 Labor and Materials. 3.3.1 Payment by Contractor. 3.3.2 Discipline and Competence.

3.4 Taxes and Other Payments to Government. 3.5 Permits, Fees, Notices, Labor and Materials.

3.5.1 Permits and Fees. 3.5.2 Compliance with Public Authorities, Notices. 3.5.3 Correlation of Contract Documents and Enactments.

USU FORM 052002 2

3.5.4 Failure to Give Notice. 3.6. Superintendent. 3.7 Time and Contractor's Construction Schedules.

3.7.1 Progress and Completion. (1) Time is of the Essence; Complete Within Contract Time. (2) Notice to Proceed and Insurance.

3.7.2 Schedule Preparation. 3.7.3 Initial Contract Time. 3.7.4 Interim Completion Dates and Milestones. 3.7.5 Schedule Content Requirements. 3.7.6 Owner's Right to Take Exceptions. 3.7.7 Float Time. 3.7.8 Initial Schedule Submission. 3.7.9 Updates. 3.7.10 Schedule of Submittals. 3.7.11 Schedule Recovery. 3.7.12 Schedule Changes and Modifications.

(1) Contract Time Change Requires Modification. (2) Contractor Reordering, Resequencing and Changing Activity Durations. (3) Changes in Contract Time.

3.7.13 Excusable Delay. (1) In General. (2) Weather-Related Excusable Delays.

3.7.14 Compensable Delay, Suspension or Interruption. (1) Basic Conditions. (2) Compensable Delay Formula. (3) Period of Compensable Delay, Suspension or Interruption. (4) Concurrent Delay.

3.7.15 Time Extension Requests. 3.7.16 Liquidated Damages.

(1) In General. (2) No Waiver of Owner's Rights.

3.8 Documents and Samples at the Site, Certifying "As-Builts". 3.9 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

3.9.1 Not Contract Documents. 3.9.2 Promptness. 3.9.3 Not Perform Until Consultant Approves. 3.9.4 Representations by Contractor. 3.9.5 Contractor's Liability. 3.9.6 Direct Specific Attention to Revisions. 3.9.7 Informational Submittals. 3.9.8 Reliance on Professional Certification.

3.10 Use of Site. 3.10.1 In General. 3.10.2 Access to Neighboring Properties.

3.11 Access to Work. 3.12 Royalties and Patents. 3.13 Indemnification.

3.13.1 In General.

ARTICLE 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT.

4.1 Consultant's Administration of the Contract.

USU FORM 052002 3

4.1.1 In General. 4.1.2 Site Visits. 4.1.3 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. 4.1.4 Consultant May Reject Work, Order Inspection, Tests. 4.1.5 Consultant Review Contractor's Submittals. 4.1.6 Consultant Prepare Change Orders, Directives, and Field Orders.

4.2 Request for Equitable Adjustment. 4.2.1 Filing REA. 4.2.2 Content. 4.2.3 Only General Contractor May File. 4.2.4 Continuing Contract Performance. 4.2.5 Special Additional Requirements:

(1) Concealed or Unknown Conditions. (a) Historical and Archeological Considerations

(2) Increase in Contract Sum. (3) Increase in Contract Time.

4.2.6 Resolution of REA. 4.3 Claims.

4.3.1 Time Period for Filing Claim. (1) If REA is Filed and Denied. (2) When REA Procedure is Not Used.

4.3.2 Content Requirements. 4.3.3 Only General Contractor May File. 4.3.4 Continuing Contract Performance. 4.3.5 Payments of Undisputed Amounts. 4.3.6 Scheduling Hearing or Panel. 4.3.7 Director (or Designee) Decision. 4.3.8 Assessment of Costs.

4.4 Appeal of Director (or Designee's) Decision. 4.5 Mediation.

ARTICLE 5. SUBCONTRACTORS

5.1 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work. 5.1.1 Approval Required. 5.1.2 Business and Licensing Requirements. 5.1.3 Subsequent Changes. 5.1.4 Bonding of Subcontractors.

5.2 Subcontractual Relations. 5.2.1 Comply with Contract Documents. 5.2.2 Rights. 5.2.3 Sub-Subcontractors. 5.2.4 Document Copies.

5.3 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts. 5.3.1 Conditions for Assignment to Owner.

ARTICLE 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

6.1 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts. 6.1.1 In General. 6.1.2 Coordination and Revisions.

USU FORM 052002 4

6.2 Mutual Responsibility. 6.2.1 Contractor Coordination. 6.2.2 Reporting Problems to Owner. 6.2.3 Costs. 6.2.4 Contractor Remedial Work.

ARTICLE 7. MODIFICATIONS.

7.1 Modifications. 7.1.1 In General. 7.1.2 By Whom Issued. 7.1.3 Performance Requirements. 7.1.4 Adjusting Unit Prices.

7.2 Change Orders. 7.2.1 Adjusting Sum. 7.2.2 Owner Resolution of Sum and Standards. 7.2.3 Agreement; Change Order Issued. 7.2.4 Disagreements; Claims Process Still Applies; Construction

Change Directive May Be Issued. 7.2.5 Credits.

7.3 Construction Change Directives. 7.3.1 When Used. 7.3.2 Proceed With Work and Notify Owner About Adjustment Method. 7.3.3 Resolution of Construction Change Directives. 7.3.4 Interim Payments by Owner.

7.4 Field Order.

ARTICLE 8 . PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION.

8.1 Schedule of Values. 8.1.1 Schedule of Values.

8.2 Applications For Payment. 8.2.1 In General. 8.2.2 Payment for Material and Equipment. 8.2.3 Warranty of Title. 8.2.4 Holdback by Owner.

8.3 Certificates for Payment. 8.3.1 Issued by Consultant. 8.3.2 Consultant's Representations.

8.4 Decisions to Withhold Certification. 8.4.1 When Withheld. 8.4.2 Certification Issued When Reasons For Withholding Removed. 8.4.3 Continue Work Even if Contractor Disputes Consultant's Determination. 8.4.4 Owner Not in Breach.

8.5 Progress Payments. 8.5.1 In General. 8.5.2 Contractor and Subcontractor Responsibility. 8.5.3 Information Furnished by Consultant to Subcontractor. 8.5.4 Owner and Consultant Not Liable. 8.5.5 Certificate, Payment or Use Not Acceptance of Improper Work.

8.6 Payment Upon Substantial Completion. 8.7 Partial Occupancy or Use.

USU FORM 052002 5

8.7.1 In General. 8.7.2 Inspection. 8.7.3 Not Constitute Acceptance.

8.8 Final Completion and Final Payment. 8.8.1 Certificate for Payment. 8.8.2 Conditions for Final Payment. 8.8.3 Waiver of Claims: Final Payment. 8.8.4 Delays Not Contractor's Fault. 8.8.5 Waiver by Accepting Final Payment.

ARTICLE 9. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, SUBSTANTIAL AND FINAL COMPLETION, UNCOVERING, CORRECTION OF WORK AND WARRANTY PERIOD.

9.1 Tests and Inspections.

9.1.1 In General. 9.1.2 Failure of an Inspector to Appear. 9.1.3 Nonconforming Work. 9.1.4 Certificates. 9.1.5 Consultant Observing. 9.1.6 Promptness.

9.2 Inspections: Substantial and Final. 9.2.1 Substantial Completion Inspection. 9.2.2 Final Completion Inspection.

9.3 Uncovering of Work. 9.3.1 Uncover Uninspected Work. 9.3.2 Observation Prior to Covering. 9.3.3 When an Inspector Fails to Appear or Consultant or Owner Did Not Make

Prior Request. 9.4 Correction of Work and Warranty Period.

9.4.1 Contractor Correct the Work. 9.4.2 Warranty and Correction After Substantial Completion. 9.4.3 Removal of Work. 9.4.4 Not Limit Other Obligations.

9.5 Additional Warranties. 9.5.1 In General. 9.5.2 Exclusion. 9.5.3 Furnish Evidence on Request.

9.6 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work.

ARTICLE 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY.

10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs. 10.1.1 Contractor Responsibility. 10.1.2 Hazardous Materials.

10.2 Safety of Persons and Property. 10.2.1 Contractor Responsibility. 10.2.2 Safety Program, Precautions. 10.2.3 Compliance with Laws. 10.2.4 Erect and Maintain Safeguards. 10.2.5 Utmost Care. 10.2.6 Prompt Remedy. 10.2.7 Safety Designee. 10.2.8 Load Safety.

USU FORM 052002 6

10.2.9 Off-Site Responsibility. 10.3 Emergencies.

ARTICLE 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS.

11.1 Liability Insurance. 11.1.1 OCIP. 11.1.2 In General. 11.1.3 Configurations. 11.1.4 Contractor Liability. 11.1.5 Certificate, Notice Requirements, Additional Insured. 11.1.6 Deductible Liability. 11.1.7 Alternative Coverage.

11.2 "Builder's Risk" Property Insurance. 11.2.1 In General. 11.2.2 Inspections, Recommendations. 11.2.3 Deductible. 11.2.4 Adjusted With and Payable to Risk Manager as Trustee. 11.2.5 Waiver. 11.2.6 Special Hazards.

11.3 Performance Bond and Payment Bond.

ARTICLE 12. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS.

12.1 Consultant's Responsibilities. 12.2 Successors and Assigns. 12.3 Written Notice.

12.3.1 Personal Delivery and Registered or Certified Mail. 12.3.2 Fax.

12.4 Rights and Remedies. 12.4.1 Not Limit. 12.4.2 Not Waiver.

12.5 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period. 12.5.1 Before Substantial Completion. 12.5.2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certification for Payment. 12.5.3 After Final Certification for Payment. 12.5.4 Exception.

12.6 Not Discriminate, No Sexual Harassment. 12.7 Applicable Laws. 12.8 Capitalization. 12.9 Interpretation. 12.10 Venue. 12.11 Separability. 12.12 Construction of Words. 12.13 No Third Party Rights.

ARTICLE 13. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT.

13.1 Termination by Contractor. 13.1.1 In General. 13.1.2 Notice.

USU FORM 052002 7

13.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause. 13.2.1 In General. 13.2.2 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work. 13.2.3 Items Required to be Transferred or Delivered. 13.2.4 Payment. 13.2.5 Owner Protection if Lienable. 13.2.6 Credits and Deficits. 13.2.7 If Contractor Found Not in Default or Excusable. 13.2.8 Rights and Remedies Not Exclusive.

13.3 Suspension, Delay or Interruption of Work by the Owner for Convenience. 13.3.1 By Owner in Writing. 13.3.2 Time Period for Claims. 13.3.3 Adjustments.

13.4 Termination for Convenience of the Owner. 13.4.1 In General. 13.4.2 Contractor Obligations. 13.4.3 Termination Claim. 13.4.4 Agreed Upon Payment. 13.4.5 Payment Not Agreed Upon. 13.4.6 Deductions. 13.4.7 Partial Termination. 13.4.8 Partial Payments. 13.4.9 Preserve and Make Available Records.

13.5 Owners Right to Stop the Work.

USU FORM 052002 8

G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S

ARTICLE 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS.

1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS.

ADDENDA. "Addenda" means the written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the bidding documents or the Contract Documents.

BID. "Bid" means the offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting

forth the prices for the Work to be performed.

BONDS. "Bonds" mean the bid bond, performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security.

CHANGE ORDER. "Change Order" means a written instrument signed by the Owner and

Contractor, stating their agreement for changes of the Contract as specified on the required Owner's change order form.

CLAIM. "Claim" means a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right,

modification, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. A Request for Equitable Adjustment (REA) shall not be considered a "claim." If a Request for Equitable Adjustment is denied in whole or in part, a claim may be filed in accordance with Article 4 of these General Conditions.

CONSULTANT (including all design professionals). "Consultant" means the person lawfully

licensed to practice architecture or engineering or an entity lawfully practicing architecture or engineering identified as such in the Consultant's Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Consultant" also means the Consultant's representative and its consultants. When these General Conditions are part of a Contract in which the design professional is an interior designer, landscape Consultant or other design professional, the term "Consultant" as used in these General Conditions shall be deemed to refer to such design professional. A license is not required when the type of design professional is one which is not subject to a professional license, but such professional must meet the prevailing standards in the State of Utah for such practice.

CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE. A "Construction Change Directive" means a

written order signed by the Owner, directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions; even if it may impact the Contract Sum and Contract Time.

CONTRACT. The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The term "Contract"

represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Consultant and Contractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or (3) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and Contractor.

USU FORM 052002 9

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The term "Contract Documents" means the Contractor's Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter referred to as "Contractor's Agreement"), the Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, other documents listed in the Contractor's Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contractor's Agreement. The Contract Documents shall also include the bidding documents, including the Instructions to Bidders, Notice to Contractors and the Bid Form, to the extent not in conflict with the other above-stated Contract Documents and other documents and oral presentations as part of the Selection which are documented as an attachment to the Contract.

CONTRACT SUM. The term "Contract Sum" means the Contract Sum as stated in the

Contractor's Agreement and, including authorized and signed adjustments to this agreement (modifications), is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.

CONTRACT TIME. "Contract Time", unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,

means the period of time, including authorized and signed adjustments (modifications), stated in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.

CONTRACTOR. The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Contractor's

Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case, shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.

DAY. The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless

otherwise specifically defined.

DEFECTIVE. "Defective" is an adjective which when modifying the word "Work" refers to Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents, or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, referenced standard, code, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged.

DIRECTOR. “Director” means the Director of USU Facilities Design and Construction unless the

context requires otherwise. Director may include a designee selected by the Director for the particular function referred to in the General Conditions.

DRAWINGS. The "Drawings" are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents,

wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, and generally include the drawings, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.

FIELD ORDER. "Field Order" means a written order issued by the Owner or the Consultant

which directs minor changes in the Work in accordance with Article 7 but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time.

INSPECTION. The word “inspection” or its derivatives shall mean a review of the Project,

including but not limited to a visual review of the Work completed to date to ascertain if the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, including all applicable building codes and construction standards.

MODIFICATION. A "Modification" is (1) a Change Order (2) Construction Change Directive or

(3) Field Order. The Contract may be amended or modified only by (1) a written amendment executed by both the Owner and Contractor, or (2) by a Modification.

USU FORM 052002 10

NOTICE TO PROCEED. A "Notice to Proceed" is a document prepared by the Owner and by its terms authorizes the Contractor to commence Work on the Project. It is deemed issued upon being sent by the Owner to the Contractor's specified address within the bid or proposal.

OWNER. "Owner" or pronoun used in place thereof, means Utah State University, as represented

by Facilities Design and Construction of the Department of Administrative Services. The Owner is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.

OWNER'S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE. "Owner's Designated Representative" means

the Owner's Program Director or other representative as assigned by the Owner.

PARTIAL USE. "Partial Use" means placing a portion of the Work in service for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) before reaching Substantial Completion for all the Work. This partial use does not constitute "substantial completion".

PRODUCT DATA. "Product Data" means illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts,

instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

PROJECT. The "Project" means the total construction of the Work performed under the Contract

Documents.

PROJECT MANUAL (FOR CONSTRUCTION). The "Project Manual" is the volume assembled for the Work and may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, General or Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Specifications.

REQUEST FOR EQUITABLE ADJUSTMENT. A "Request for Equitable Adjustment" (REA)

is an informal request to resolve matters. It shall not be considered a "claim." If a Request for Equitable Adjustment is denied in whole or in part, a claim may be filed in accordance with Article 4 of these General Conditions.

SAMPLES. "Samples" mean physical examples, which illustrate materials, equipment or

workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

SHOP DRAWINGS. "Shop Drawings" means drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

SPECIFICATIONS. The "Specifications" are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting

of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards, installation and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related systems and services.

SUBCONTRACTOR. “Subcontractor” means the person or entity that has a direct contract with

the Contractor or with another Subcontractor to provide labor or materials for the work. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the text in which the term is used may provide for the exclusion of Subcontractors of other Subcontractors or the exclusion of suppliers. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The Term “Subcontractor” does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. "Substantial Completion" is the date certified by the

Consultant in accordance with Paragraph 9.2 and means the date the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete, and any lack of completion or performance does not reasonably interfere with the

USU FORM 052002 11

Owner's intended use of the Project, in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy and use the Work for its intended use.

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OR SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL

CONDITIONS. "Supplementary Conditions" or "Supplementary General Conditions" means the part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions.

WORK. The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract

Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all labor, materials, equipment and services provided, or to be provided, by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.

1.2 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF CONSULTANT'S DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS. All Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Consultant are and shall remain the property of the Owner, and Owner shall retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights with respect thereto. Said documents were prepared and are intended for use as an integrated set for the Project which is the subject of this Contractor's Agreement. They shall not be modified or used on any other project without the prior written consent of the Owner and Consultant. Any such nonpermissive use or modification, by Contractor, the Contractor's Subcontractors at any tier or anyone for whose acts the Contractor is liable, shall be at Contractor's sole risk. Contractor shall hold harmless and indemnify the Owner from and against any and all claims, actions, suits, costs, damages, loss, expenses and attorney fees arising out of such non-permissive use or modification by the Contractor. The Contractor and Subcontractors are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Consultant appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Consultant. Submittals or distributions necessary to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes relating to completion of the Project are not to be construed as a publication in derogation of the Owner's copyright or other reserved rights.

ARTICLE 2. OWNER.

2.1 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER.

2.1.1 OWNER'S DESIGNATED REPRESENTATIVE. The Owner shall designate an Owner's Designated Representative authorized to act in the Owner's behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or such authorized representative shall render decisions within a reasonable time pertaining to documents submitted by the Consultant and/or Contractor in order to avoid a compensable delay in the orderly and sequential progress of the Project.

2.1.2 SPECIALISTS AND INSPECTORS. The Owner will provide certified building

inspection services in accordance with the adopted Building Codes. This includes 'routine' and 'special' inspections unless noted in the Consultant Agreement. The Owner may assign an inspector or specialist to note deviations from, or necessary adjustments to, the Contract Documents or to report deficiencies or defects in the Work. The inspector or specialist's activities in no way relieves the Contractor of the responsibilities set forth in the Contract Documents.

2.1.3 SURVEYS AND LEGAL DESCRIPTION. The Owner shall furnish surveys

describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall review this information, including the surveys and any provided soils tests, and compare such information with observable physical conditions and the Contract Documents.

USU FORM 052002 12

2.1.4 PROMPT INFORMATION AND SERVICES. Upon receipt of a written request from the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish information or services under the Owner's control with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work.

2.1.5 COPIES OF DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUALS (FOR

CONSTRUCTION). Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, such copies of Drawings and Project Manuals (for construction) as are reasonably necessary for execution of the Work.

2.1.6 OTHER DUTIES. The foregoing is in addition to other duties and responsibilities of the

Owner enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Article 6 (Construction by Owner or by Separate Contractors), Article 8 (Payments and Completion) and Article 11 (Insurance and Bonds).

ARTICLE 3. CONTRACTOR

3.1 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR.

3.1.1 REVIEWING CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INFORMATION, REPORTING

ERRORS, INCONSISTENCIES OR OMISSIONS. The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Paragraph 2.1 hereinabove and shall at once report to the Owner and Consultant errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Consultant for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omission in the Contract Documents, unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission or a Contractor of ordinary skill and expertise for the type of Work involved would have readily so recognized such error, inconsistency or omission, and the Contractor failed to report such to the Owner and Consultant. If the Contractor performs any construction activity without such notice to the Owner and Consultant and resolution of the error, inconsistency or omission, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable costs for correction.

3.1.2 FIELD CONDITIONS. The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field

conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor, or information which a Contractor of ordinary skill and expertise for the type of Work involved would have known, before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Owner and Consultant at once. If the Contractor performs any construction activity without such notice to the Owner and Consultant and resolution of the error, inconsistency or omission, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable costs for correction.

3.1.3 PERFORM IN ACCORDANCE WITH DOCUMENTS AND SUBMITTALS.

The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pursuant to Paragraph 3.9 hereinbelow.

3.1.4 PERFORMANCE TO PRODUCE THE COMPLETE SYSTEM AND INTENDED

RESULTS. Performance by the Contractor shall be required to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents as being necessary to allow the system to function within its intended use.

3.1.5 INTENT AND HIERARCHY. The Contract Documents should be read as a whole and

wherever possible, the provisions should be construed in order that all provisions are operable. The intent of the contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complimentary, and what is required by one

USU FORM 052002 13

Document or provisions thereof shall be as binding as if required by all the Documents or provisions thereof. In case of an irreconcilable conflict between provisions within a Contract Document or between Contract Documents, the following priorities shall govern as listed below:

(1) A particular Modification shall govern over all Contract Document provisions or

Modifications issued prior to said particular Modification.

(2) Attachments resulting from the Selection process including any management plan or documented interview information.

(3) A particular Addendum shall govern over all other Contract Document provisions

issued prior to said particular Addendum. Subsequent Addenda shall govern over all prior Addenda.

(4) The Supplementary General Conditions shall govern over the General Conditions.

(5) These General Conditions shall govern over all other Contract Documents except for the Supplementary General Conditions, Addenda, Modifications and Attachments resulting from the selection process.

above. (6) The drawings and specifications shall not govern over any of the documents listed

(7) In case of a conflict or ambiguity within the same level of hierarchy of described

documents, Owner reserves the right to select the most stringent requirement unless the preponderance of the contract indicates the less stringent requirement.

3.1.6 DIVIDING WORK AND CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATION. Organization of the

specifications into division, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings, shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. Contractor represents that the Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, manufacturers and suppliers engaged or to be engaged by it are and will be familiar with the requirements for performance by them of their obligations.

3.1.7 PLANNING AND PRIORITY. The Contractor shall plan and schedule its work to

facilitate the Project and shall maintain a work schedule to place proper priority to sequence work to complete the project timely.

3.2 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES.

3.2.1 SUPERVISION AND CONTROL. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,

using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, except to the extent that the Contract Documents expressly and specifically state otherwise.

3.2.2 RESPONSIBILITY. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and

omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors, and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor or on behalf of the Contractor.

3.2.3 NOT RELIEVED OF OBLIGATIONS. The Contractor shall not be relieved of

obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Owner or its agents in the Owner's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor.

USU FORM 052002 14

3.2.4 INSPECTIONS AND APPROVALS.

(1) The Contractor is responsible for requesting inspections for various stages and portions of the Work required under the Contract Documents in a timely manner.

(2) If any of the Work is required to be inspected or approved by the terms of the

Contract Documents by any public authority, the Contractor shall timely request such inspection or approval to be performed in accordance with Article 9. Except as provided in Article 9, work shall not proceed without any required inspection and the associated authorization to proceed. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner if the inspector fails to appear at the site.

3.3 LABOR AND MATERIALS.

3.3.1 PAYMENT BY CONTRACTOR. Except to the extent it is otherwise stated in the

Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipments, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities, supplies, consumables and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

3.3.2 DISCIPLINE AND COMPETENCE. The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and

good order among the Contractor's employees, its Subcontractors, agents, representatives and other persons performing under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them.

3.4 TAXES AND OTHER PAYMENTS TO GOVERNMENT. The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use, employment-related and similar taxes related to the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect.

3.5 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES, LABOR AND MATERIALS.

3.5.1 PERMITS AND FEES. Unless required in the Supplementary General Conditions or an

Addendum, it will not be necessary for the Contractor to obtain or pay for local building permits, plan check fees, electrical permits, plumbing permits, connection fees, or impact fees, nor will it be necessary to pay fees for inspections pertaining thereto.

3.5.2 COMPLIANCE WITH PUBLIC AUTHORITIES, NOTICES. The Contractor shall

comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, resolutions, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on the performance of the Work.

3.5.3 CORRELATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND ENACTMENTS. It is

not the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, resolutions, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes, or if such is readily observable to a Contractor of ordinary skill and expertise for the type of Work involved, that a portion of the Contract Documents is at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Consultant and Owner in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.

3.5.4 FAILURE TO GIVE NOTICE. If the Contractor, or any Subcontractor thereof

performs Work without complying with the requirements of Paragraph 3.5.3 hereinabove, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the appropriate amount of the attributable costs.

USU FORM 052002 15

3.6. SUPERINTENDENT. The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case.

3.7 TIME AND CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES.

3.7.1 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION.

(1) TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE; COMPLETE WITHIN CONTRACT TIME.

Time is of the essence. By executing the Contractor's Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is adequate to perform the Work. The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.

(2) NOTICE TO PROCEED AND INSURANCE. The Contractor shall not

prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the issuance of a Notice to Proceed by the Owner or prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor, whichever is the latter.

3.7.2 SCHEDULE PREPARATION. The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the

Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Consultant's review a reasonably detailed CPM schedule for the Work. The schedule shall indicate the order, sequence, and interdependence of all items known to be necessary to complete the Work including construction, procurement, fabrication, and delivery of materials and equipment, submittals and approvals of samples, shop drawings, procedures, or other documents. Work items of the Owner, other Contractors, utilities and other third parties that may affect or be affected by the Contractor shall be included. If the Owner is required, by the Contract Documents, to furnish any materials, equipment, or the like, to be incorporated into the Work by the Contractor, Contractor shall submit, with the first schedule submittal, a letter clearly indicating the dates that such items are required at the Project Site. The critical path should be identified, including the critical paths for interim completion dates and milestones. The CPM schedule shall be developed using Primavera, MS Project, or Suretrack unless otherwise authorized by the Owner's Designated Representative. The Contractor's schedule shall be updated at least once a month and submitted with each pay request.

3.7.3 INITIAL CONTRACT TIME. Unless otherwise specified in the bidding documents, the

initial Contract Time is the time proposed by the Contractor and accepted by the Owner in the selection process.

3.7.4 INTERIM COMPLETION DATES AND MILESTONES. The schedule must include

contractually specified interim completion dates and milestones. The milestone completion dates indicated are considered essential to the satisfactory performance of this Contract and to the coordination of all Work on the Project. The milestone dates listed are not intended to be a complete listing of all Work under this Contract or of interfaces with other Project Contractors.

3.7.5 SCHEDULE CONTENT REQUIREMENTS. The schedule shall indicate an early

completion date for the Project that is no later than the Project's required completion date. The schedule, including all activity duration's shall be given in calendar days. The Schedule shall also indicate all of the following:

(1) Interfaces with the work of outside contractors (e.g., utilities, power and with any

separate Contractor);

(2) Description of activity including activity number/numbers;

USU FORM 052002 16

(3) Estimated duration time for each activity;

(4) Early start, late start, early finish, late finish date, and predecessor/successors including stop-start relationships with lead and lag time for each activity;

(5) Float available to each path of activities;

(6) Actual start date for each activity begun;

(7) Actual finish date for each activity completed;

(8) The percentage complete of each activity in progress or completed;

(9) Identification of all critical path activities;

(10) The critical path for the Project, with said path of activities being clearly and easily recognizable on the time-scaled network diagram. The path(s) with the least amount of float must be identified. Unless otherwise authorized by the Owner's Designated Representative, no more than 40% of all activities may be identified as critical path items. The relationship between non-critical activities and activities on the critical path shall be clearly shown on the network diagram;

(11) Unless otherwise authorized by the Owner's Designated Representative, all

activities on the schedule representing construction on the site may not have a duration longer than 14 days. Construction items that require more than 14 days to complete must be broken into identifiable activities on the schedule with durations less than 14 days. The sum of these activities represents the total length required to complete that construction item; and

(12) Additional requirements as specified in the Supplemental General Conditions.

3.7.6 OWNER'S RIGHT TO TAKE EXCEPTIONS. The Owner reserves the right to take

reasonable exception to activity duration, activity placement, construction logic or time frame for any element of the Work to be scheduled.

3.7.7 FLOAT TIME. Float or slack time is defined as the amount of time between the earliest

start date and the latest start date or between the earliest finish date and the latest finish date of a chain of activities on the Schedule. By a proposal request or modification delivered to the Contractor, the Owner has the right to use the float time for non-critical path activities until the Contractor has reallocated such time on a newly submitted schedule.

3.7.8 INITIAL SCHEDULE SUBMISSION. No progress payments will be approved until the

Contractor has submitted a Project detailed CPM schedule covering the first 90 days of the Work with a general CPM schedule for the entire project. The detailed schedule for the entire project is to be completed prior to the second pay request unless otherwise authorized in writing by the Owner's Designated Representative.

3.7.9 UPDATES. Prior to any approval of a pay request, the Owner, Consultant and Contractor

shall review the Contractor's schedule compared to the Work completed. The Owner approves the amount of Work completed as supported by the schedule of values. If necessary, the Contractor shall then update and submit to the Owner the schedule with the pay request; all of which in accordance with the Owner's approval. All updates shall be provided in electronic and hard copy formats. At each scheduled meeting with the Owner's Designated Representative, the Contractor shall provide a "three week look ahead" with long lead items identified.

USU FORM 052002 17

3.7.10 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS. The Contractor shall prepare and keep current, for the Consultant's and Owner's review, a schedule of submittals required under the Contract Documents which is coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule and allows the Consultant a reasonable time to review the submittals. This submittal schedule is to be included as part of the construction schedule. Submittals requiring expedited review must be clearly identified as such in the schedule of submittals.

3.7.11 SCHEDULE RECOVERY. If the Work represented by the critical path falls behind

more than 7 days, the project schedule shall be redone within 14 days showing how the Contractor shall recover the time. A narrative that addresses the changes in the schedule from the previously submitted schedule shall be submitted along with the schedule in both hard copy (appropriate report formats to be determined by the Owner's Designated Representative) and electronic copy. The Contractor shall comply with the most recent schedules.

3.7.12 SCHEDULE CHANGES AND MODIFICATIONS.

(1) CONTRACT TIME CHANGE REQUIRES MODIFICATION. The Contract

Time may only be shortened or extended by a written modification fully executed by the Owner.

(2) CONTRACTOR REORDERING, RESEQUENCING AND CHANGING ACTIVITY DURATIONS. Should the Contractor, after approval of the complete detailed construction network, desire to change his plan of construction, he shall submit his requested revisions to the Owner and the Consultant along with a written statement of the revisions including a description of the sequence and duration changes for rescheduling the work, methods of maintaining adherence to intermediate milestones and the contract completion date and the reasons for the revisions. If the requested changes are acceptable to the Owner, which acceptance shall not be unreasonably withheld, they will be incorporated into the Schedule in the next reporting period.

If after submitting a request for change in the Contract Schedule, the Owner does not agree with the request, the Owner will schedule a meeting with the Contractor to discuss the differences.

(3) CHANGES IN CONTRACT TIME. The critical path schedule as the term is

used in the provisions herein shall be based on the current version of the Contractor's schedule for the Project and accepted by the Owner just prior to the commencement of the modification, asserted delay, suspension or interruption. If the Contractor believes it is entitled to an extension of Contract Time under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Designated Representative an analysis ("Requested Time Adjustment Schedule") in accordance with the Contract Documents for time extensions. The "Requested Time Adjustment Schedule" shall include "fragnets" that represent the added or changed work to the Schedule. The impact on unchanged activities caused by the changes and/or delays being analyzed shall be included in these fragnets.

A "fragnet" as used in these General Conditions and when used in the context of project scheduling is a subset of project activities that are inter-related by predecessor and successor relationships that are tied into the main schedule with identified start and completion points. Each fragnet may or may not be on the critical path. An entire schedule consists of a series of inter-related fragnets.

3.7.13 EXCUSABLE DELAY.

(1) IN GENERAL. If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work

on the critical path schedule by an act or neglect of the Owner or other causes beyond the Contractor's control or by other causes which the Owner determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order. The Contractor shall immediately take all steps reasonably possible to lessen the adverse impact of such delay. Notwithstanding the above, to the extent any of the causes for delay were

USU FORM 052002 18

caused by the Contractor, reasonably foreseeable by the Contractor or avoidable by the Contractor, then to such extent the delay shall not be cause for extension of the Contract Time.

The determination of the total number of days extension will be based upon the current construction schedule in effect at the inception of the change and/or delay and upon all data relevant to the extension as it exists in the project record. Once approved, such data shall be incorporated in the next monthly update of the schedule.

Contractor acknowledges and agrees that delays in work items which, according to the schedule analysis, do not affect any milestone dates or the Contract completion dates shown on the CPM at the time of the delay, will not be the basis for a contract extension.

(2) WEATHER-RELATED EXCUSABLE DELAYS. Completion time will not be

extended for normal bad weather or any weather that is reasonably foreseeable at the time of entering into the contract. The time for completion as stated in the contract documents includes due allowance for calendar days on which Work cannot be performed out of doors. The Contractor acknowledges that it may lose days due to weather conditions. Contract time may be extended at no cost to the Owner if all of the following are met which must be established by the Contractor:

(a) That the weather prevented Work from occurring that is on the critical path

for the project based upon a critical path schedule previously submitted to the Owner and to the extent accepted by the Owner;

(b) There are no concurrent delays attributed to the Contractor;

(c) The Contractor took all reasonable steps to alleviate the impact of the

weather and took reasonable attempts to prevent the delay and despite such reasonable actions of Contractor, the weather impacted the critical path as described above; and

(d) one of the following occurred:

1. The weather was catastrophic, such as a tornado, hurricane, severe

wind storm, severe hail storm; or

2. Based on the full history of information published from the closest station as indicated from the Western Regional Climate Center (Desert Research Institute 2215 Raggio Parkway Reno, Nevada 89512, and as may be described on their website at http://www.wrcc.dri.edu/summary/), one or more of the following occurred:

a. For any day between November 1 and March 31, the

minimum temperature fell below the average minimum temperature plus the extreme low temperature recorded for the month divided by 2.

b. For any day between November 1 and March 31, the

maximum temperature fell below the monthly average for the minimum temperature.

day maximum for the month. c. The daily precipitation exceeded 75% of the historical one

d. The snowfall for the month exceeded 175% of the

historical average snow fall for the month.

3.7.14 COMPENSABLE DELAY, SUSPENSION OR INTERRUPTION.

USU FORM 052002 19

(1) BASIC CONDITIONS. In addition to the other requirements of the Contract Documents, a compensable delay, suspension or interruption of the work occurs only when the following are met:

(a) is wholly unanticipated by the parties at the time of execution of the

Contractor's Agreement or is caused by the breach of a fundamental obligation of the Contract Documents attributable to the Owner; and

(b) the Contractor files an REA or claim under Article 4 and such is received

by the Owner and said continuation affects the Contract Time as indicated by the Project's critical path schedule.

(2) COMPENSABLE DELAY FORMULA. To the extent of the compensable

delay, the Contractor's total entitlement for all compensable delay damages is the computed result of the following formula: Contract Sum divided by Contract Time (in calendar days); the result of which is then multiplied by 0.05; and the result of which is multiplied by the number of calendar days of compensable days allowed under these General Conditions that are beyond the Contract Time.

(3) PERIOD OF COMPENSABLE DELAY, SUSPENSION OR

INTERRUPTION. The length and extent of compensable delay, shall be determined, with the use of the Project's critical path schedule, by ascertaining the number of additional days to the Contract Time that are needed in order to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as a result of the continuation of the aforesaid delay, suspension or interruption after receipt of the REA or claim by the Owner under Article 4 and following the requirements of 3.7.12.

(4) CONCURRENT DELAY. Notwithstanding any other provision of these General

Conditions, to the extent a non-compensable delay occurs at the same time as a compensable delay, the Owner shall not be responsible for any compensation for the period of the non-compensable delay.

3.7.15 TIME EXTENSION REQUESTS. Any time extension shall be requested within 21 days

after the Contractor knew or should have known about the delay and shall be supported by the critical path schedule analysis.

3.7.16 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES.

(1) IN GENERAL. Should the Contractor fail to complete the Work within the

Contract Time, there shall be deducted from any amount due or that may become due the Contractor, the sum as stated in the Contractor's Agreement. Such sum is fixed and agreed upon by the Owner and Contractor as liquidated damages due the Owner by reason of the inconvenience and added costs of administration, engineering, supervision and other costs resulting from the Contractor's default, and not as a penalty. Actual damages related to delay can not be ascertained at the time of execution of the Contract. To the extent that the liquidated damages exceed any amounts that would otherwise be due the Contractor, the Contractor shall be liable for such excess to the Owner. Owner may seek enforcement of such obligation by legal action, and if such is necessary, shall recover the related costs and attorney fees. Notwithstanding any other provision of these General Conditions, the availability of liquidated damages to the Owner shall not limit the Owner's right to seek damages or other remedies available under law or equity to the extent such damages or remedies are not based upon delay.

(2) NO WAIVER OF OWNER'S RIGHTS. Permitting the Contractor to continue

any part of the Work after the time fixed for completion or beyond any authorized extension thereof, shall in no way operate as a waiver or estoppel on the part of the Owner of any of its rights under the Contract Documents, including the right to liquidated damages or any other remedies or compensation.

USU FORM 052002 20

3.8 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE, CERTIFYING "AS-BUILTS". The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner, one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked weekly to record changes and selections made during construction, as well as approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals. These aforesaid items shall be available to the Consultant and shall be delivered to the Consultant for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work, signed by the Contractor, certifying that they show complete and exact "as-built" conditions, stating sizes, kind of materials, vital piping, conduit locations and similar matters. All notes of encountered or changed conditions shall be included.

3.9 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES.

3.9.1 NOT CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and

similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The submittal shall demonstrate, for those portions of the Work for which the submittal is required, the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

3.9.2 PROMPTNESS. The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to the Consultant,

Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors.

3.9.3 NOT PERFORM UNTIL CONSULTANT APPROVES. The Contractor shall

perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved in writing by the Consultant. Such Work shall be in accordance with the approved submittals.

3.9.4 REPRESENTATIONS BY CONTRACTOR. By approving and submitting Shop

Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.

3.9.5 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility

for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Consultant's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Consultant in writing of such deviation at the time of the submittal and the Consultant has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Consultant's review and comment.

3.9.6 DIRECT SPECIFIC ATTENTION TO REVISIONS. The Contractor shall direct

specific attention in writing to all revisions on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, except those requested by the Consultant and indicated on previous submittals.

3.9.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS. Informational submittals upon which the

Consultant is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.

3.9.8 RELIANCE ON PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATION. When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Owner and Consultant shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications. If a professional stamp is required, the professional shall be licensed in the State of Utah unless otherwise approved by the Owner in writing. Likewise, the Contractor is entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of the calculations made by the Consultant in developing the

USU FORM 052002 21

Contract Documents, unless a Contractor of ordinary skill and expertise for the type of Work involved would know that such is inaccurate or incomplete and therefore must immediately notify the Owner.

3.10 USE OF SITE.

3.10.1 IN GENERAL. The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by

the Contract Documents, law, ordinances, resolutions, rules and regulations, and permits and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. Contractor shall take all reasonable means to secure the site protect the site and the Work from any damage. The site shall be left free and clear of refuse, equipment, materials, etc. and the site shall not be subject to spilled liquids and chemicals, toxic or otherwise. Should such an incident occur while the Contractor has control of the site, the Contractor shall be responsible to clean the site and pay all associated costs, fines and penalties. Notwithstanding this, Contractor is not responsible for any damage to the site or the Work to the extent caused by the Owner or the Owner's agents.

3.10.2 ACCESS TO NEIGHBORING PROPERTIES. The Contractor shall not, except as

provided in the Contract Documents or with the Owner's advance written consent when necessary to perform the Work, interfere with access to properties neighboring the Project site by the owners of such properties and their respective tenants, agents, invitees and guests.

3.11 ACCESS TO WORK. The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Consultant access to the Work in preparation and progress, wherever located.

3.12 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Consultant harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Owner.

3.13 INDEMNIFICATION.

3.13.1 IN GENERAL.

(1) To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold

harmless the State of Utah, the State of Utah's institutions, agencies, departments, divisions, authorities, and instrumentalities, boards, commissions, elected or appointed officers, employees, agents, authorized volunteers (hereinafter the above listing of entities and persons is referred to an “indemnities”) from and against every kind and character of claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, and including those events covered under the blanket Contractual Liability Coverage required under the Contract Documents, arising out of or resulting from any act or omission in the performance of the Work including the work of all the Subcontractors and their employees, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in whole or in part by the negligent or wrongful act or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, and their employees, provided that any such claim, damage loss or expense is caused in whole or in part by the negligent or intentional act or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed or the agent of any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. The Contractor shall defend all actions brought upon such matters to be indemnified hereunder and pay all costs and expenses incidental thereto, but the State of Utah shall have the right, at its option, to participate in the defense of any such action without relieving the Contractor of any obligation hereunder. Notwithstanding any of the above, to the extent the Contractor is complying with a written directive from the Owner, that is not based on the Contractor's recommendation, the

USU FORM 052002 22

Contractor shall not be held liable under the indemnification provision of this Agreement if the Contractor has promptly disagreed with the written directive by delivering such objection to the Owner in writing.

(2) Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any

other right or obligation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party or person under Contract Documents.

(3) In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.13 by an

employee of the Contractor, Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Paragraph 3.13 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or Subcontractor under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefits acts or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE 4. ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT.

4.1 CONSULTANT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT.

4.1.1 IN GENERAL. The Consultant assists the Owner with the administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents. The Consultant shall have the authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents or Consultant's Agreement.

4.1.2 SITE VISITS.

(1) Site visits or inspections by the Consultant, the Owner or any Owner representative

shall in no way limit or affect the Contractor's responsibility to comply with all the requirements and the overall design concept of the Contract Documents as well as all applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, resolutions, codes, rules, regulations, orders and decrees.

(2) WRITTEN REPORT. The Consultant shall promptly submit to the Owner a

written report subsequent to each site visit.

4.1.3 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION. Except as authorized by the Owner's Designated Representative or as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, including these General Conditions, the Consultant and Contractor shall communicate through the Owner's Designated Representative on issues regarding the timing of the Work, cost of the Work or scope of the Work. Contractor shall comply with communication policies agreed upon at any pre- construction meeting with the Owner. Communications by and with the Consultant's sub-consultants shall be through the Consultant. Communications by and with Subcontractors shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner.

4.1.4 CONSULTANT MAY REJECT WORK, ORDER INSPECTION, TESTS. The

Consultant shall have the responsibility and authority to reject Work which, based upon the Consultant's knowledge or what may be reasonably inferred from the Consultant's site observations and review of data, does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Consultant considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Consultant shall have the responsibility and authority to require additional inspections or testing of the Work in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed, provided, however, the Consultant must obtain the Owner's prior written approval of any such additional inspections or testing. However, neither this authority of the Consultant nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Consultant to the Contractor, Subcontractors, their agents or employees or other persons performing portions of the Work, including separate contractors. If the Contractor disputes the rejection of any Work and the correction

USU FORM 052002 23

thereof shall involve additional cost or time, it shall be the Owner's option to accept such Work whether it be conforming or nonconforming.

4.1.5 CONSULTANT REVIEW CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS.

(1) Contractor shall submit shop drawings, product data, and samples and other

submittals required by the Contract Documents to the Consultant as required by the approved submittal schedule.

(2) The Consultant shall review and approve or take other appropriate action upon

Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the purpose of checking for conformance with the information and design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Consultant action taken on a submittal shall not constitute a Modification of this Agreement.

(3) The Consultant's action shall be taken no later than 15 days following Consultant’s

receipt of the submittal, unless agreed to otherwise by Contractor and Owner, in order to avoid a delay in the Work of the Contractor or of separate contractors while allowing sufficient time in the Consultant's professional judgment to permit adequate review.

(4) Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the

accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents.

(5) The Consultant's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the

Contractor of the obligations under Article 3 and Paragraph 9.4 of these General Conditions.

(6) The Consultant's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Consultant, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures.

(7) The Consultant's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an

assembly of which the item is a component.

(8) When professional certification of performance characteristics of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Consultant shall be entitled to rely upon such certifications to establish that the materials systems or equipment will meet the performance criteria required by the Contract Documents.

4.1.6 CONSULTANT PREPARE CHANGE ORDERS, DIRECTIVES, AND FIELD

ORDERS. The Consultant shall prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives with specific documentation and data for the Owner's approval and execution in accordance with the Contract Documents, and may issue Field Orders not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time which are not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.

4.2 REQUEST FOR EQUITABLE ADJUSTMENT.

4.2.1 FILING REA. Contractor may file a Request for Equitable Adjustment (REA) within

twenty (21) days after the Contractor first recognizes or should have recognized the condition giving rise to the REA, whichever occurs first. Failure to so file an REA or a Claim as provided for below shall be considered a waiver of the right to pursue the REA or a claim at any later point. Contractor may file a written request for equitable adjustment (REA) by delivery to the Owner's Designated Representative in an effort to resolve matters that arise on the Project.

USU FORM 052002 24

4.2.2 CONTENT. In order to facilitate the resolution of the matter, the Requests for Equitable Adjustment should state the specific grounds relied upon and the specific relief requested.

4.2.3 ONLY GENERAL CONTRACTOR MAY FILE. Only a General Contractor shall have

the right to file a Request for Equitable Adjustment with the Owner. No subcontractor at any tier shall have the right to file a Request for Equitable Adjustment with the Owner or maintain any claim on its own against the Owner. Any Subcontractor right to equitable adjustment or claim, may only be with the General Contractor.

4.2.4 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE. Pending final resolution of a

Request for Equitable Adjustment, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.

4.2.5 SPECIAL ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS:

(1) CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS. If the REA relates to

conditions encountered at the site which are (a) unknown and reasonably unforeseeable subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (b) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give notice to the Owner and Consultant of such conditions within three working days and shall not disturb those conditions without written authorization from the Owner.

(a) HISTORICAL AND ARCHEOLOGICAL CONSIDERATIONS. In

the event of discovery of any underground man-made object, object associated with humans or animals, or suspected archeological artifact; work must cease until DFCM can make an appraisal of its historical significance. A significant archeological discovery would be treated contractually as an unknown site condition. Contractor cooperation with the archeologists is a requirement of this contract.

(2) INCREASE IN CONTRACT SUM. If the REA relates to a request to increase

the contract sum and the Contractor claims the work is not included within the already executed contract and modifications, then the Contractor shall process the REA and have written approval from the Owner prior to proceeding with the work sought to be an extra.

(3) INCREASE IN CONTRACT TIME. The provisions of this Section and

Sections 3.7.12, 3.7.13, and 3.7.14 apply. In case of a continuing delay only one REA is necessary.

4.2.6 RESOLUTION OF REA.

(1) The Owner's Designated Representative shall attempt to resolve the issues of the Request for Equitable Adjustment with the Contractor. The Owner's Designated Representative may request a written analysis by the Consultant with a reasonable deadline. The Consultant shall comply with any such request.

(2) The Owner's Designated Representative shall provide a decision to the Contractor

within 30 days unless such time period is extended by both the Contractor and Owner. Failure of the Owner's Designated Representative to provide the decision within thirty (30) days, shall be deemed a denial of the REA.

USU FORM 052002 25

4.3 CLAIMS.

4.3.1 TIME PERIOD FOR FILING CLAIM.

(1) IF REA IS FILED AND DENIED. If an REA is denied by the Owner's Designated Representative in whole or in part, the Contractor may file a written claim with the Director of the Division of Facilities Construction Management, certified mail, return receipt requested, within twenty-one (21) days of such denial. Failure to so file a written claim within said period shall be considered a waiver of the right to pursue the claim.

(2) WHEN REA PROCEDURE IS NOT USED. If the Contractor chooses to not

file an REA, and wishes to proceed to a claim directly, a claim must be filed within twenty (21) days after the Contractor first recognizes or should have recognized the condition giving rise to the claim, whichever occurs first. Failure to so file the claim within said period shall be considered a waiver of the right to pursue the claim at any later point. The claim shall be made by written notice sent certified mail, return receipt requested, to the owner's designated representative.

4.3.2 CONTENT REQUIREMENTS. All claims shall state the specific grounds relied upon

and the specific relief requested. Detailed records supporting the Claim need not accompany the Claim, but must be maintained and made available, to the extent such records are customarily maintained and would be discoverable in a Utah court of law, within a reasonable time upon request.

4.3.3 ONLY GENERAL CONTRACTOR MAY FILE. Only a General Contractor shall have

the right to file a Claim with the Owner. No subcontractor at any tier shall have the right to file a Claim with the Owner or maintain any claim on its own against the Owner. Any Subcontractor rights to equitable adjustment or a claim, may only be with the General Contractor.

4.3.4 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE. Pending final resolution of a Claim,

unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.

4.3.5 PAYMENTS OF UNDISPUTED AMOUNTS. Pending final resolution of a claim, the

Owner shall pay the undisputed portion of the claim.

4.3.6 SCHEDULING HEARING OR PANEL. If unresolved by the Owner's Designated Representative within 21 days of filing the claim with the Director, the matter shall be scheduled for an informal hearing with the Director or the Director's designee. The Director may also elect to have a panel report to the Director on the Request for Equitable Adjustment. If such panel is used, the Claimant must cooperate with reasonable requests of the panel in providing relevant information and documents or said claim shall be considered waived.

4.3.7 DIRECTOR (OR DESIGNEE) DECISION. The Director or the Director's designee

shall prepare and send to the parties, a written decision, certified mail, return receipt requested, no later than ninety (90) days from the date the Owner's Designated Representative received the claim by certified mail. This time period may be extended by a reasonable request from the Owner based upon additional time being needed to finalize expert reports and/or investigations.

4.3.8 ASSESSMENT OF COSTS. If the Claim is denied and determined to be made in bad

faith or is frivolous, by the Director or the Director's designee, the Contractor may be assessed the costs, or a portion thereof, of such review including the fee of any experts, design professional, attorney and staff costs.

USU FORM 052002 26

4.4 APPEAL OF DIRECTOR (OR DESIGNEE'S) DECISION. The claim may be further pursued with the Utah Procurement Appeals Board or the Third Judicial District Court in accordance with Utah law.

4.5 MEDIATION. Claims not resolved as hereinabove described and any and all other claims or disputes arising out of or related to this Contract, the parties’ performance hereunder, or the parties’ relationship as created by this Contract, shall be submitted to mediation prior to initiation of litigation. Mediation of any such other claim or dispute may be demanded by either party at any time upon written notice to the other party as herein provided. In furtherance of this Contract to mediate, the parties shall: (i) select a mutually-acceptable mediator; (ii) exchange discoverable documents which either reasonably believes to be relevant and material to the issue(s) in dispute and necessary to an effective mediation; (iii) engage and cooperate in such further discovery as they may agree or which the mediator suggests may be necessary to facilitate an effective mediation; (iv) exchange written position papers which state their position in the dispute and outline the subject matter and substance of the anticipated testimony of individuals having personal knowledge of the facts underlying the dispute, and; (v) mediate in good faith. In the event the parties are unable to agree upon a mediator, the mediator shall be appointed by a court of competent jurisdiction. Witness expenses shall be borne by the party producing the witness. Mediator fees and expenses shall be paid equally by the parties. The mediator shall have the same immunity as is available to federal district court judges.

ARTICLE 5. SUBCONTRACTORS.

5.1 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK.

5.1.1 APPROVAL REQUIRED.

(1) Listing of Subcontractors shall be as required by U.C.A. 63A-5-208 as amended

and/or as stated in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the "USU Subcontractors List Form".

(2) The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the

Owner has made a reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection.

5.1.2 BUSINESS AND LICENSING REQUIREMENTS. All Subcontractors used by the

Contractor shall comply with all applicable business and licensing requirements.

5.1.3 SUBSEQUENT CHANGES. After the lapse of twenty-four (24) hours from the bid opening, the Contractor may change its listed Subcontractors only in accordance with Rule R 23-1 and the Contract Documents and with written approval of the Director of Facilities Design and Construction.

5.1.4 BONDING OF SUBCONTRACTORS. Subcontractors as identified by Owner in the

procurement documents, may be required to submit performance and payment bonds to cover the full extent of their portion of the Work. This provision does not in any way limit the right of the Contractor to have subcontractors at any tier be required to have a performance and/or payment bond.

5.2 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS.

5.2.1 COMPLY WITH CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. By appropriate enforceable

agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes towards the Owner and Consultant.

USU FORM 052002 27

5.2.2 RIGHTS. Each Subcontractor agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Consultant under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the Subcontractor agreement, the benefit of all rights and remedies against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner.

5.2.3 SUB-SUBCONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter

into similar agreements with its Subcontractors which complies with the requirements of Subparagraphs 5.2.1 and 5.2.2 hereinabove.

5.2.4 DOCUMENT COPIES. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed

Subcontractor, prior to execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of the Contract Documents available to their respective proposed Subcontractors.

5.3 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS.

5.3.1 CONDITIONS FOR ASSIGNMENT TO OWNER. Each subcontract agreement for

a subcontractor at any tier for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that the assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 13.2 or stoppage of the Work by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 13.5, and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing. The subcontract shall be equitably adjusted to meet the new conditions of the work.

ARTICLE 6. CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS.

6.1.1 IN GENERAL. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations

related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor has a compensable Claim due to such action by Owner, Contractor shall make such Claim in accordance with Article 4.

6.1.2 COORDINATION AND REVISIONS. The Owner shall provide for coordination of

the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule and Contract Sum deemed necessary after a joint review and agreement by the Owner. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised.

6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY.

6.2.1 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION. The Contractor shall afford the Owner and

separate contractor(s) a reasonable opportunity for delivery and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

USU FORM 052002 28

6.2.2 REPORTING PROBLEMS TO OWNER . If part of the Contractor's Work depends on work by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Owner apparent defects in workmanship that would render it unsuitable for proper execution. Failure of the Contractor to make said report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects in workmanship not then reasonably discoverable.

6.2.3 COSTS. Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective

construction shall be borne by the responsible party in accordance with the Contract Documents.

6.2.4 CONTRACTOR REMEDIAL WORK. The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed Work or to property of the Owner or separate contractors and subcontractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.6.

ARTICLE 7. MODIFICATIONS.

7.1 MODIFICATIONS.

7.1.1 IN GENERAL. Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or Field Order, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

7.1.2 BY WHOM ISSUED. A Change Order or Construction Change Directive shall be

issued by the Owner. A Field Order is issued by the Consultant or by the Owner.

7.1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS. Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or Field Order.

7.1.4 ADJUSTING UNIT PRICES. If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or

subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause a substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

7.2 CHANGE ORDERS.

7.2.1 ADJUSTING SUM. If the Change Order provides for an adjustment to the Contract

Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:

(1) mutual acceptance of a fixed sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

(2) unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

(3) cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee with the Contractor providing, in such form as the Consultant may prescribe, an itemized accounting with appropriate supporting data; or

(4) as provided in Subparagraph 7.2.2 hereinbelow.

USU FORM 052002 29

7.2.2 OWNER RESOLUTION OF SUM AND STANDARDS. If the Contractor and Owner do not agree on any of the above methods for adjustment of the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be determined on the basis of reasonable actual costs and savings as demonstrated by an itemized accounting with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Subparagraph shall be limited to the following:

(1) all direct and indirect costs of labor; including workers compensation insurance,

social security and other federal and state payroll based taxes, and payroll based fringe benefits paid by Contractor so long as they are reasonable and no higher than that charged to other clients;

(2) costs of materials, on-site temporary facilities, supplies and equipment (except

hand tools) required for or incorporated into the work;

(3) rental costs of machinery, equipment, tools (except hand tools), and on-site temporary facilities, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

(4) costs of permits and other fees, sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work;

(5) additional costs of field supervision and field office personnel directly attributable

to the change; and

(6) overhead and profit by the following liquidated formula which is not a penalty but a reasonable calculation agreed upon at the time of execution of the Contractor's Agreement, and provided by formula herein due to the fact that the actual amount due for said overhead and profit cannot easily be ascertained at the time of such execution. The markups in 7.2.2(6)(a) and (b) are to cover the Contractor's additional payment and performance bond premiums, insurance premiums not specified under 7.2.2(1), home office overhead and profit. Overhead and profit includes, but is not limited to the Contractor’s Project Manager and Cost Estimator. Each request for pricing shall stand on its own and not be combined with other requests for pricing in determining the allowed markup described below. A particular request for pricing shall include all items reasonably related together and determinable at the time of the request. If several unrelated requests for pricing are grouped together in a single Change Order, each request for pricing will be considered separately for purposes of calculating the markup under the following formula:

(a) A markup of 15% shall be applied to the cost of each individual change up

to $20,000 in cost, but in no case shall the markup be less than $150;

(b) A markup of 10% shall be applied to the portion of the cost of each individual charge in excess of $20,000;

(c) Subcontractors at any tier shall be entitled to markup their costs related to

a Change Order with the same percentages as specified in 7.2.2(6)(a) and (b) above, except that the minimum markup shall be $50 for any individual change.

7.2.3 AGREEMENT; CHANGE ORDER ISSUED. When the Owner and the Contractor

agree on the adjustment in the Contract Time and/or Contract Sum, the agreed to adjustment shall be incorporated in an appropriate Change Order.

7.2.4 DISAGREEMENTS; CLAIMS PROCESS STILL APPLIES; CONSTRUCTION

CHANGE DIRECTIVE MAY BE ISSUED. If there is no agreement with the adjustment in Contract Time and/or Contract Sum, then the disagreement is still subject to the Article 4 claims resolution process. A Construction Change Directive may be issued in the interim.

USU FORM 052002 30

7.2.5 CREDITS. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Consultant.

7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES.

7.3.1 WHEN USED. A Construction Change Directive may be issued in the case of an

immediate need for the Work to commence.

7.3.2 PROCEED WITH WORK AND NOTIFY OWNER ABOUT ADJUSTMENT METHOD. Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Owner of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contact Sum or Contract Time. Any disagreement is still subject to the requirements of the claims resolution process in Article 4 hereinabove.

7.3.3 RESOLUTION OF CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES. Contractor and

Owner shall use best efforts to promptly reach an agreement as to the impact of the Construction Change Directive on the Contract Sum and Contract Time and have such agreement reflected in a Change Order. If the Owner is not able to reach agreement with the Contractor, the Owner shall prepare a proposed Change Order which shall become effective as a Change Order 21 days after notification to the Contractor unless the Contractor files a claim under Article 4 before the expiration of the 21 days.

7.3.4 INTERIM PAYMENTS BY OWNER. Pending final determination of cost to the

Owner, Owner shall pay any amount not disputed by the Owner of the estimated cost indicated on the Construction Change Directive as the Work under the Construction Change Directive progresses.

7.4 FIELD ORDER. The Consultant will have the authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. If the Contractor wishes to contend that said minor change does involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner of the Contractor's position regarding compensation and time. If such contention is not resolved with the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim in accordance with Article 4.

ARTICLE 8 . PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION.

8.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES.

8.1.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES. Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Consultant a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Consultant may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Consultant, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. The Contractor shall not be entitled to payment until receipt and acceptance of the Schedule of Values.

8.1.2 FORM. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such a manner that each major item of

the Work and each subcontracted item of the Work is shown as a separate line item on AIA Document G703, Application and Certification for Payment, Continuation Sheet, or other form acceptable to the Owner.

USU FORM 052002 31

8.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT.

8.2.1 IN GENERAL. The Contractor shall submit to the Consultant an itemized Application for Payment for Work completed in accordance with the schedule of values and that reflects retainage as provided for in the Contractor's Agreement. Such application shall be notarized and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as the Owner or Consultant may require. Said data may include, but is not limited to, copies of requisitions from Subcontractors.

(1) Such applications may include requests for payment pursuant to 7.3.4.

(2) Such applications may not include requests for payment of amounts the Contractor

does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor because of a dispute or other reason.

8.2.2 PAYMENT FOR MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner and Consultant, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. The Owner may require copies of invoices or other suitable documentation.

8.2.3 WARRANTY OF TITLE. The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an

Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time for payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment, all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and/or equipment relating to the Work.

8.2.4 HOLDBACK BY OWNER. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the

Contract Documents, the Owner may, as a result of the claims resolution process, withhold any payment to the Contractor hereunder if and for so long as the Contractor fails to perform any of its obligations hereunder or otherwise is in default under any of the Contract Documents.

8.3 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT.

8.3.1 ISSUED BY CONSULTANT. The Consultant shall within ten (10) days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Consultant determines due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Consultant's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 8.4.1. If the Consultant fails to act within said ten (10) day period, the Contractor may file the Application for Payment directly with the Owner’s Designated Representative and the Owner will thereafter have twenty (20) days from the date of the Owner’s receipt to resolve the amount to be paid and to pay the undisputed amount. The accuracy of the Contractor's Applications for Payment shall be Contractor's responsibility, not Consultant's.

8.3.2 CONSULTANT'S REPRESENTATIONS. The Consultant’s issuance of a Certificate

for Payment shall constitute a representation to the Owner that to the best of the Consultant’s knowledge, information and belief, based upon the Consultant’s observations at the site, the data comprising the Application for Payment, and what is reasonably inferable from the observations and data, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated in the Application and that the quality of the work is in accordance

USU FORM 052002 32

with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Consultant. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment shall not be a representation that the Consultant has (a) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (b) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (c) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment, (d) ascertained how or for what purpose the Contractor used money previously paid on account of Contract Sum, or (e) any duty to make such inquiries.

8.4 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION.

8.4.1 WHEN WITHHELD. The Consultant may decide not to certify payment and may

withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Consultant's judgment the representations to the Owner required in Subparagraph 8.3.2 above can not be made or under Subparagraph 8.2.4 above. If the Consultant is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Consultant shall notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Subparagraph 8.3.1 above. If the Contractor and Consultant can not agree on a revised amount, the Consultant shall promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount to which the Consultant makes such representations to the Owner. The Consultant may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or observations, may nullify the whole or part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Consultant's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of:

(1) defective Work not remedied;

claims; (2) third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such

(3) failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor,

materials or equipment;

(4) reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

(5) damage to the Owner or another contractor;

(6) reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,

and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

(7) failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

8.4.2 CERTIFICATION ISSUED WHEN REASONS FOR WITHHOLDING

REMOVED. When the reasons stated in Subparagraph 8.4.1 for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for such related amounts.

8.4.3 CONTINUE WORK EVEN IF CONTRACTOR DISPUTES CONSULTANT'S

DETERMINATION. If the Contractor disputes any determination by the Consultant or the result of the claims resolution process with regard to any Certification of Payment, the Contractor nevertheless shall expeditiously continue to prosecute the Work.

USU FORM 052002 33

8.4.4 OWNER NOT IN BREACH. The Owner shall not be deemed to be in breach of this Contract by reason of the withholding of any payment pursuant to any provision of the Contract Documents provided the Owner's action or such withholding is consistent with the results of the claims resolution process.

8.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS.

8.5.1 IN GENERAL. Except as provided in Paragraph 8.3.1, the Owner shall pay any

undisputed amount within thirty (30) days of the date that the application for payment was submitted to the Consultant. In no event shall Owner be required to pay any disputed amount.

8.5.2 CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY. The Contractor

shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payment to its Subcontractors in a similar manner.

8.5.3 INFORMATION FURNISHED BY CONSULTANT TO SUBCONTRACTOR.

The Consultant shall, on request, furnish to the Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Consultant and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.

8.5.4 OWNER AND CONSULTANT NOT LIABLE. Neither the Owner or Consultant

shall have an obligation to pay, monitor or enforce the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except to the extent as may otherwise be required by law.

8.5.5 CERTIFICATE, PAYMENT OR USE NOT ACCEPTANCE OF IMPROPER

WORK. A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

8.6 PAYMENT UPON SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Consultant, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or portion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents. To the extent allowed by law, the Owner may retain up to 200% of the fair market value of the work that has not been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

8.7 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE.

8.7.1 IN GENERAL. The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed

portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is Substantially Complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of the warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion to be substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Consultant as previously provided for herein. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. Contractor shall have continuing responsibility to protect the site and the Work during such partial occupancy and shall be responsible for damage except to the extent caused solely by the Owner during such partial occupancy or use.

USU FORM 052002 34

The stage of progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

8.7.2 INSPECTION. Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner,

Contractor and Consultant shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work.

8.7.3 NOT CONSTITUTE ACCEPTANCE. Except to the extent it is agreed upon in writing

by the Owner, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portion of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirement of the Contract Documents.

8.8 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT.

8.8.1 CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT. The Consultant's final Certificate for Payment shall

constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 8.8.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.

8.8.2 CONDITIONS FOR FINAL PAYMENT. Neither final payment nor any remaining

retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Consultant the following to the extent required by the Owner:

(1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for material and equipment, and other indebtedness

connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied;

(2) a current or additional certificate evidencing that insurance required by the

Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice, by certified mail, return receipt requested, has been given to the Owner;

(3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the

insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents;

payment; (4) if requested by surety in a timely manner or by Owner, consent of surety, to final

(5) Receipt of Record Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other

Modifications maintained at the site; the warranties, instructions, operation and maintenance manuals, and training videos required to be furnished by the Contract Documents;

(6) Other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts,

releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Owner may require consent of Surety to the final payment. If such liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances remain unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees; and

(7) A written statement demonstrating how the Contractor will distribute interest

earned on retention to Subcontractors as required by Section 13.8.5, U.C.A.

8.8.3 WAIVER OF CLAIMS: FINAL PAYMENT. The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from:

USU FORM 052002 35

unsettled;

(1) liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and

(2) failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;

(3) terms of warranties required by the Contract Documents; or

(4) the one-year warranty period and any corrected Work.

8.8.4 DELAYS NOT CONTRACTOR'S FAULT. If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Consultant, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. Unless otherwise stated by the Owner in writing, the making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of claims by the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 8.8.3 of these General Conditions for that portion of that Work fully completed and accepted by the Owner.

8.8.5 WAIVER BY ACCEPTING FINAL PAYMENT. Acceptance of final payment by

the Contractor or a Subcontractor shall constitute a waiver of Claims by that payee except those Claims previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. Such waivers shall be in addition to the waiver described in Subparagraph 8.8.3 of these General Conditions.

ARTICLE 9. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, SUBSTANTIAL AND FINAL COMPLETION, UNCOVERING, CORRECTION OF WORK AND WARRANTY PERIOD.

9.1 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS.

9.1.1 IN GENERAL. Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the

Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, resolutions or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise specifically set forth in the Contract Documents or agreed to by the Owner in writing, the Owner shall contract for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent entity, or with the appropriate public authority, and the Owner shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals except as provided in 9.1.2 below. If any of the Work is required to be inspected or approved by the terms of the Contract Documents by any public authority, the Contractor shall, at least two working days prior to the time of the desired inspection, and following the procedures established by the Owner, request such inspection or approval to be performed. The Contractor shall give the Consultant timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Consultant may observe such procedures.

9.1.2 FAILURE OF AN INSPECTOR TO APPEAR. Work shall not proceed without any

required inspection and the associated authorization to proceed unless the following procedures and requirements have been met:

(1) The inspection or approval was requested in a timely manner as provided in

Subparagraph 9.1.1;

(2) The Contractor received written confirmation by fax or other means that the inspection was scheduled;

USU FORM 052002 36

(3) The Contractor has contacted or attempted to contact the inspector to confirm that the inspector is unable to perform the inspection as scheduled;

(4) If the inspector has confirmed that it is unable to perform the inspection as

scheduled or if the Contractor is unable to contact the inspector, the contractor shall attempt to contact the State Building Official or other authority having jurisdiction; and

(5) The Contractor has documented the condition of the work prior to being covered

through photos or other means.

9.1.3 NONCONFORMING WORK. If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 9.1.1 reveal failure of portions of the Work to comply with the requirements established by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Owner's expenses, including the cost of retesting for verification of compliance if necessary, until the Owner accepts the Work in question as complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

9.1.4 CERTIFICATES. Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless

otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Consultant.

9.1.5 CONSULTANT OBSERVING. If the Consultant is to observe tests, inspections or

approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Consultant shall do so with reasonable promptness and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.

9.1.6 PROMPTNESS. Tests, inspections and arrangements for approvals conducted pursuant

to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.

9.2 INSPECTIONS: SUBSTANTIAL AND FINAL.

9.2.1 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION. Prior to requesting a substantial completion inspection, the Contractor shall prepare a comprehensive initial punchlist, including unresolved items from prior inspections, for review by the Owner and Consultant to determine if the Project is ready for a substantial completion inspection. If the Owner determines that the initial punchlist indicates that the Project is not substantially complete, the initial punchlist will be returned to the Contractor with written comments. If the Owner determines that the initial punchlist indicates that the Project may be substantially complete, the Consultant shall promptly organize and perform a Substantial Completion inspection in the presence of the Owner and all appropriate authorities.

(1) If the Consultant reasonably determines that the initial punchlist prepared by the

Contractor substantially understates the amount of the Work remaining to be completed and the Project is not substantially complete, the Consultant shall report this promptly to the Owner, and upon concurrence of the Owner, the Contractor will be assessed the costs of the inspection and punchlist preparation incurred by the Consultant and the Owner.

(2) When the Work or designated portion thereof is Substantially Complete, the

Consultant shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion; shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the work and insurance; and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the punchlist accompanying the Certificate. If there is a punchlist, the Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on the punchlist does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

USU FORM 052002 37

(3) Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof except to the extent as provided otherwise in the Contract Documents or if such warranty is related to an item where the work is not complete. Such warranty documents shall state the length of the warranty, which must comply with the Contract Documents.

(4) The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and

Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.

(5) Except to the extent the Owner's designated representative otherwise approves in advance and in writing, the Contractor shall submit the following documents in order to achieve Substantial Completion: written warranties, guarantees, operation and maintenance manuals, and all complete as-built drawings. The Contractor must also provide or obtain any required approvals for occupancy. The Contractor is responsible for the warranty of all Work, whether performed by it or by its Subcontractors at any tier.

9.2.2 FINAL COMPLETION INSPECTION. Prior to requesting a final inspection, the

Contractor shall verify all punchlist items are corrected/completed. Once all punchlist items are corrected/completed the Contractor shall notify the Owner and request a final inspection. The Owner shall notify the Consultant and perform a final inspection. Two final inspections may be allowed due to required weather changes required to complete some items. When all punchlist items are completed a final pay request will be provided by the Contractor, authorized by the Consultant and processed by the Owner.

9.3 UNCOVERING OF WORK.

9.3.1 UNCOVER UNINSPECTED WORK. Except as provided in Subparagraph 9.3.3, if a

portion of the Work is covered prior to an Inspector's approval to proceed, it must, be uncovered for the Inspector's inspection and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time.

9.3.2 OBSERVATION PRIOR TO COVERING. Except as provided in Subparagraph 9.3.3,

if the Owner or the Consultant has requested in writing to observe conditions prior to any Work being covered or if such observation is specified in the Contract Documents, and the Work is covered without such observation, the Contractor shall be required to uncover and appropriately replace the Work at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. If the Contractor requests an inspection and the Owner or Consultant, including any inspector of each, does not appear, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner of such lack of appearance, but shall not cover the Work without such inspection.

9.3.3 WHEN AN INSPECTOR FAILS TO APPEAR OR CONSULTANT OR OWNER

DID NOT MAKE PRIOR REQUEST. If work is performed by the Contractor without an inspection as provided in Subparagraph 9.1.2 or if a portion of the Work has been covered which the Consultant or Owner has not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered or such observation is not specified by the Contract Documents, the Consultant or Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement, shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs.

9.4 CORRECTION OF WORK AND WARRANTY PERIOD.

9.4.1 CONTRACTOR CORRECT THE WORK. The Contractor shall correct Work

rejected by the Consultant, Inspector or Owner, or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear the costs of correcting such rejected Work, including

USU FORM 052002 38

additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Consultant's and Inspector's services and expenses made necessary thereby.

9.4.2 WARRANTY AND CORRECTION AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. If

within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.2.1 or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, including failure to perform for its intended purpose, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of the Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. This obligation of the Contractor under this Subparagraph 9.4.2 shall be operative notwithstanding the acceptance of the Work under the Contract, the final certificate of payment, partial or total occupancy and/or termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness, however, failure to give such notice shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligation to correct the Work at the cost that the Contractor would have incurred if the Owner did so report with reasonable promptness. All corrected Work shall be subject to a one-year warranty period the same in all respects as the original Work, except that such warranty period shall commence from the time of Substantial Completion of the corrected Work. This warranty period does not affect the Owner's right to pursue any available remedies against Contractor.

9.4.3 REMOVAL OF WORK.

(1) The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all Work that the Owner

and/or the Consultant determines as being in nonconformance with the Contract Documents, whether incorporated or not.

(2) The Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute the Work in accordance with

the Contract Documents and without expense to the Owner.

(3) The Contractor shall bear the expense of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or of other contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.

(4) If the Contractor does not remove such condemned Work within a reasonable time,

fixed by written notice, the Owner may have the materials removed and stored at the expense of the Contractor.

(5) If the Contractor does not correct the nonconforming Work within a reasonable

time, fixed by written notice, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 13.2.2 of these General Conditions.

9.4.4 NOT LIMIT OTHER OBLIGATIONS. Nothing contained in this Paragraph 9.4 shall

be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor may have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described in Paragraph 9.4.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.

USU FORM 052002 39

9.5 ADDITIONAL WARRANTIES.

9.5.1 IN GENERAL. In addition to any other provisions of this Article 9, the following warranties shall apply:

(1) The Contractor warrants to the Owner that materials and equipment furnished

under the Contract will be of good quality and new, except to the extent otherwise required or expressly permitted by the Contract Documents.

(2) The Contractor also warrants to the Owner that the Work will be free from defects

not inherent in the quality required or permitted and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to said requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective at the Owner's option.

9.5.2 EXCLUSION. Unless due to the negligent or intentional act or omission of the Contractor or those under the Contractor's control, or as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage.

9.5.3 FURNISH EVIDENCE ON REQUEST. If requested by the Consultant or Owner, the

Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the type and quality of materials and equipment.

9.6 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK. If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum shall be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.

ARTICLE 10. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY.

10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS.

10.1.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.

10.1.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS. In the event the Contractor encounters on the site

material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or any other hazardous waste or substance which may endanger the health of those persons performing the Work or being on the site, which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner and Consultant by phone with a follow-up document in writing. The Work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or said hazardous waste or substance, or when it has been rendered harmless according to the Federal and State health standards. Except to the extent provided otherwise in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall not be required to perform without consent, any Work relating to asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) or any other hazardous waste or substance.

10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY.

10.2.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY. The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions

for the safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:

USU FORM 052002 40

(1) employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

(2) the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or a Subcontractor; and

(3) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,

pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.

10.2.2 SAFETY PROGRAM, PRECAUTIONS. The Contractor shall institute a safety

program at the start of construction to minimize accidents. Said program shall continue to the final completion of the Project and conform to applicable laws and regulations including the Utah Occupational Safety and Health Rules and Regulations as published by the Utah Industrial Commission - UOSH Division. The Contractor shall post signs, erect barriers, and provide those items necessary to implement the safety program. As soon as the Contractor proceeds with the Work, the Contractor shall have all workers and all visitors on the site wear safety hard hats and obey all safety rules and regulations and statutes. The Contractor shall post a sign in a conspicuous location indicating the necessity of wearing hard hats and the Contractor shall loan such hats to visitors.

10.2.3 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS. The Contractor shall give notices and comply with

applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. In particular, the Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, Owner and municipal safety laws, rules and regulations as well as building codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about, or adjacent to the premises where the Work is being performed.

10.2.4 ERECT AND MAINTAIN SAFEGUARDS. The Contractor shall erect and maintain,

as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.

10.2.5 UTMOST CARE. When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or

equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.

10.2.6 PROMPT REMEDY. The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other

than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Subparagraph 10.2.1 of these General Conditions caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under said Subparagraph 10.2.1, except to the extent such damage or loss is directly due to errors in the Contract Documents or caused by agents or employees of the Consultant or Owner. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.13 of these General Conditions.

10.2.7 SAFETY DESIGNEE. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the

Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Consultant.

10.2.8 LOAD SAFETY. The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or

site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety.

USU FORM 052002 41

10.2.9 OFF-SITE RESPONSIBILITY. In addition to its other obligations under this Article 9, the Contractor shall, at its sole cost and expense, promptly repair any damage or disturbance to walls, utilities, streets, ways, sidewalks, curbs and the property of third parties (including municipalities and other governmental agencies) resulting from the performance of the Work, whether by it or by its Subcontractors at any tier. The Contractor shall not cause materials, including soil and debris, to be placed or left on streets or ways.

10.3 EMERGENCIES. In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7 of these General Conditions.

ARTICLE 11. INSURANCE AND BONDS.

11.1 LIABILITY INSURANCE.

11.1.1 OCIP. If required in the Supplementary General Conditions, the Contractor shall comply with the State of Utah/USU's Owner Controlled Insurance Program (OCIP).

11.1.2 IN GENERAL. To protect against liability, loss and/or expense arising from damage to

property or injury or death of any person or persons incurred in any way out of, in connection with or resulting from the Work provided hereunder, Contractor shall obtain and maintain in force during the entire period of this Contract without interruption, at its own expense, the following insurance from insurance companies authorized to do business in the State of Utah in a form and content satisfactory to the Owner and rated "A" or better with a financial size category of (a) Class X or larger where the Contract Sum is $1,000,000 or greater or (b) Class VII or larger where the Contract Sum is under $1,000,000. Said rating and financial size category shall be as published by A.M. Best Company at the time the Contract is executed.

(1) Workers' Compensation Insurance and Employers' Liability Insurance. Worker's

Compensation Insurance shall cover full liability under the Worker's Compensation Laws of the jurisdiction in which the Project is located at the statutory limits required by said jurisdiction's laws. Employer's Liability Insurance shall provide the following limits of liability: $100,000 for each accident; $500,000 for Disease-Policy Limit; and $100,000 for Disease-Each Employee. The Contractor shall require all Subcontractors to take and maintain similar policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance.

(2) Commercial General Liability Insurance and/or Comprehensive General Liability

Insurance, including coverage for premises/operations, explosion, collapse and underground hazards, products/completed operations, contractual (including this Contract), and personal injury, including employees, with limits of not less than $1,000,000 each occurrence, and not less than $2,000,000 general aggregate and $2,000,000 products/completed operations aggregate. Aggregate limit shall be designated as applying to this Contract. If this insurance coverage is written on a "claims-made" basis, the certificate of insurance required below shall so indicate and the policy shall contain an extended reporting period provision or similar "tail" provision such that claims reported up to three (3) years beyond the date of Substantial Completion of this Contract are covered. Such Commercial General Liability Insurance must provide coverage for explosion, collapse and underground hazards. Said certificate shall state that the policy required by this paragraph has been endorsed to name the State of Utah and DFCM as Additional Insureds.

(3) Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance including owned, hired and non-

owned automobiles with limits not less than $1,000,000 any one accident or loss.

USU FORM 052002 42

(4) Aircraft Use. Contractor using its own aircraft, or employing aircraft in connection with the Work performed under this Agreement shall maintain Aircraft Liability Insurance with a combined single limit of not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence. Said certificate shall state that the policy required by this paragraph has been endorsed to name Utah State University and Facilities Design and Construction as Additional Insureds.

(5) Owners Protective Liability Insurance with limits of not less than $1,000,000 shall

be purchased and maintained by Contractor. The State of Utah and all institutions, agencies, departments, authorities and instrumentalities, and while acting within the scope of their duties, all of its elected or appointed officers, agents, employees and authorized volunteers as well as members of governing bodies, boards, commissions and advisory committees, shall be named as insureds, but, only in respect to the Work to be performed under this Contract.

11.1.3 CONFIGURATIONS. Any policy required by this section may be arranged under a

single policy for the full limit required, or by a combination of underlying policies with the balance provided by an Excess or Umbrella Liability Policy.

11.1.4 CONTRACTOR LIABILITY. Irrespective of the requirements as to insurance to be

carried by Contractor as provided herein; insolvency, bankruptcy or failure of any insurance company to pay all claims accruing, shall not be held to relieve Contractor of any obligations hereunder.

11.1.5 CERTIFICATE, NOTICE REQUIREMENTS, ADDITIONAL INSURED. Before

the Contract Agreement is executed, certificates evidencing coverages as specified above are in effect, shall be furnished to the Owner. Such insurance certificates shall contain provisions that no cancellation, material change therein or non-renewal shall become effective except upon thirty (30) days prior written notice to the Owner as evidenced by return receipt, certified mail sent to Owner. The Contractor shall notify the Owner within thirty (30) days of any claims(s) against the Contractor, and if such claim(s) exceed 20% of the applicable required insured limits, the Owner may require the Contractor to re-instate the policy to provide full protection at the original limits. For any risk not covered by the Owner's protective liability insurance policy or the worker's compensation policies, the State of Utah shall be named as an additional insured party, as primary coverage and not contributing.

11.1.6 DEDUCTIBLE LIABILITY. Any and all deductibles in the above described policies

shall be assumed by, for the account of, and at sole risk of Contractor.

11.1.7 ALTERNATIVE COVERAGE. The Owner's Risk Manager may approve alternative forms of insurance to those stated above based on a finding of reasonable unavailability.

Any type of insurance or any increase of limits of liability not described in this Agreement which the Contractor requires for its own protection or on account of any statute, rule or regulation, shall be its own responsibility and at its own expense.

The carrying of any insurance required by this Agreement shall in no way be interpreted as relieving the Contractor or Subcontractors of any other responsibility or liability under this Agreement or any applicable law, statute, rule, regulation or order.

Contractor shall not violate or knowingly permit to be violated any of the provisions of the policies on insurance required under these General Conditions.

11.2 "BUILDER'S RISK" PROPERTY INSURANCE.

11.2.1 IN GENERAL. Owner shall provide "Builder's Risk" property insurance to protect

Owner, as well as all Contractors and Subcontractors, and include them as insureds, with respect to Work performed hereunder at Owner's own cost and expense, according to the policies and forms currently in

USU FORM 052002 43

force with insurance carriers selected by Owner's Risk Manager or issued by the Owner Risk Management Fund. Owner's Risk Manager shall furnish, upon request, all parties in interest with copies of said policies authenticated by authorized agents of the insurers or the Owner Risk Management Fund.

11.2.2 INSPECTIONS, RECOMMENDATIONS. Owner, the Division of Risk Management

and the Builder's Risk insurers shall have the right to inspect the Work. The Contractor shall comply with reasonable risk control recommendations made by insurers or the Division of Risk Management. Such inspections or recommendations do not relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities under the Contract Documents.

11.2.3 DEDUCTIBLE. The above described "Builders Risk" policies shall be subject to a total

deductible of $5,000 per loss occurrence, which shall be assumed by all Contractors or Subcontractors, in proportion to their share of the total amount of an insured loss occurrence.

11.2.4 ADJUSTED WITH AND PAYABLE TO RISK MANAGER AS TRUSTEE. Any

insured property loss is to be adjusted with the Owner's Risk Manager, and made payable to the Owner's Risk Manager as trustee for the Contractor and Subcontractors, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable loss payable clause.

11.2.5 WAIVER. Contractor, including all Subcontractors, and Owner hereby waive all rights

against each other for damages caused by perils insured against under the "Builder's Risk" insurance provided by Owner, except such rights as Contractor may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner's Risk Manager as trustee. The Owner and the Contractor each shall require similar waivers from their contractors, subcontractors, subconsultants and agents, at any tier.

11.2.6 SPECIAL HAZARDS. Owner shall bear the risk of loss, delay and/or damage due to

earthquake and/or flood and may either insure or self-insure that risk. If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for other special hazards be included in the "Builder's Risk" policy, the Owner's Risk Manager shall, if possible, include such insurance in the policy and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by Change Order.

11.3 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND. The Contractor shall submit and maintain in full force and effect as required by law and the Contract Documents, at its own expense, on forms provided by Facilities Design and Construction, and include as part of the quoted total all costs involved in securing and furnishing, the bonds listed below, based on the completed cost of the Contract and effective upon execution of the Contract. Said bonds shall be from surety companies which are authorized to do business in the State of Utah, listed in the U. S. Department of Treasury Circular 570, Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies, and acting within the limitation listed therein.

11.3.1 A full 100 percent performance bond covering the faithful execution of the Contract in

accordance with the Contract Documents; and

11.3.2 A full 100 percent payment bond covering payment of all obligations arising under the Contract Documents, for the protection of each person supplying labor, service, equipment, or material for the performance of the Work.

ARTICLE 12. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS.

12.1 CONSULTANT'S RESPONSIBILITIES. These General Conditions are not intended to provide an exhaustive or complete list of the Consultant's responsibilities. A separate agreement between the Owner and Consultant incorporates these General Conditions by reference.

USU FORM 052002 44

12.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not assign the Contract without the prior written consent of the Owner, nor shall the Contractor assign any amount due or to become due as well as any rights under the Contract, without prior written consent of the Owner.

12.3 WRITTEN NOTICE.

12.3.1 PERSONAL DELIVERY AND REGISTERED OR CERTIFIED MAIL. Written

notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, to the last business address known to the party giving notice.

12.3.2 FAX. Notwithstanding any other provision of these General Conditions, written notice

shall also be deemed to have been duly served by verified use of a FAX system by using the known and operative calling number. Service by use of the FAX system is encouraged when timely notice will benefit the Owner, Consultant or Contractor. Notice shall be considered complete and verified upon the sending and confirmation of delivery using the FAX system, if on the same day notice is also sent by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, to the last business address known to the party giving notice, confirming the FAX delivery.

12.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES.

12.4.1 NOT LIMIT. Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and

remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.

12.4.2 NOT WAIVER. Except as expressly provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, no

action or failure to act by the Owner, Consultant or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as any of the above may be specifically agreed to in writing. In no case shall the Contractor or any Subcontractors be entitled to rely upon any waiver of any of these General Conditions unless agreed to in writing by the Owner.

12.5 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD.

12.5.1 BEFORE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. Except as provided in 12.5.4 below, as to

acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion.

12.5.2 BETWEEN SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND FINAL CERTIFICATION

FOR PAYMENT. Except as provided in 12.5.4 below, as to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certification for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certification for Payment.

12.5.3 AFTER FINAL CERTIFICATION FOR PAYMENT. Except as provided in 12.5.4

below, as to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any warranty provided under Article 9 the date of any correction of the Work or

USU FORM 052002 45

failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under 9.4.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last.

12.5.4 EXCEPTION. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Paragraph 12.5 to the

contrary, no applicable statute of limitations shall be deemed to have commenced with respect to any portion of the Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, which would not be visible or apparent upon conducting a reasonable investigation, and which is not discovered by the Owner until after the date which, but for this Subparagraph 12.5.4, would be the date of commencement of the applicable statute of limitations; the applicable statute of limitations instead shall be deemed to have commenced on the date of such discovery by the Owner.

12.6 NOT DISCRIMINATE, NO SEXUAL HARASSMENT. Pursuant to the laws of the State of Utah, the Contractor, Subcontractors, or anyone for whose act any of them may be liable, will take affirmative action to not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color, sex, religion, ancestry or national origin. To the extent applicable, said persons will comply with all provisions of Executive Order No. 11246 dated September 24, 1965 and rules, regulations, orders, instructions, designations and other directives promulgated pursuant thereto. Contractor, Subcontractors, or anyone for whose act any of them may be liable, shall not act in any manner as would violate the laws, regulations and policies of the United States or the State of Utah prohibiting sexual harassment.

12.7 APPLICABLE LAWS. The applicable laws and regulations of the State of Utah, as well as any applicable local laws and regulations not superceded by State law, shall govern the execution of the Wok embodied in the Contract Documents as well as the interpretation of the Contract Documents.

12.8 CAPITALIZATION. Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the title of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs , Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of referenced documents published by the American Institute of Architects and other organizations.

12.9 INTERPRETATION. In the interest of brevity, the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and articles such as “the” and “an”, but the fact that a modification or an article is absent from the statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.

12.10 VENUE. In case of any dispute, which may arise under the Contract Documents, the place of venue shall be in the County of Cache, Utah, unless otherwise agreed to by all the parties in writing.

12.11 SEPARABILITY. The invalidity of any part, paragraph, subparagraph, phase, provision or aspect of the Contract documents shall not impair or affect in any manner the validity, enforceability or effect of the remainder of the Contract Documents.

12.12 CONSTRUCTION OF WORDS. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words, which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings, shall be construed as having such recognized meanings. Unless the context requires otherwise, all other technical words shall be construed in accordance with the meaning normally established by the particular, applicable profession or industry. All other words, unless the context requires otherwise, shall be construed with an ordinary, plain meaning.

12.13 NO THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. These General Conditions create rights and duties only as between Subcontractors, Owner and Contractor, and Owner and Consultant. Nothing contained herein shall be deemed as creating third party beneficiary contract rights or other actionable rights or duties as between Contractor and Consultant, or as between Owner, Contractor, or Consultant on the one hand, and any other person or entity.

USU FORM 052002 46

ARTICLE 13. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT.

13.1 TERMINATION BY CONTRACTOR.

13.1.1 IN GENERAL. If the Work is stopped for a period of sixty (60) days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with any of the above, the Contractor, may terminate the Contract in accordance with 13.1.2 hereinbelow for any of the following reasons:

(1) because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill fundamental Owner's

obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work;

(2) issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction, except that where the Contractor has standing, the Contractor must cooperate in efforts to stay and/or appeal such order;

(3) an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, making

material unavailable; or

hereinbelow. (4) unavoidable casualties or other similar causes as listed in Subparagraph 13.2.2(2)

13.1.2 NOTICE. If one of the reasons for termination in 13.1.1 hereinabove exist, the Contractor

may, upon ten (10) additional days' written notice to the Owner and Consultant, and such condition giving cause for termination still not cured, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages.

13.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE.

13.2.1 IN GENERAL. The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor fails to cure any

of the following within a period of ten (10) days (or longer if the Owner so approves in writing) after receipt of notice from the Owner specifying the cause for termination:

(1) The Contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly

skilled workers or proper materials;

(2) The Contractor fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;

(3) The Contractor persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations,

resolutions or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or

(4) The Contractor fails to perform the Work within the time specified in the Contract Documents or any authorized extension thereof or the Contractor fails to make progress with the Work as to endanger such compliance;

Documents; (5) The Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract

(6) The Contractor fails to respond promptly to the financial responsibility inquiry

under the Contractor's Agreement;

USU FORM 052002 47

bankrupt;

(7) As permissible by law for a reason to terminate, the Contractor is adjudged

(8) As permissible by law for a reason to terminate, the Contractor should make a

general assignment for the benefit to creditors;

(9) As permissible by law for a reason to terminate, the Contractor should have a receiver appointed on account of the Contractor's insolvency; or

(10) The Contractor is in breach of a material provision of the Contract Documents.

13.2.2 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK.

(1) If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents and fails within a ten (10) day period (or longer if approved by the Owner in writing) after receipt of written notice from the Owner to cure such default or neglect, the Owner may without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies, including taking over the Work and prosecuting the same to completion, by contract or otherwise, and may take possession of, and utilize in completing the Work, such materials, appliances and plant as may be on the site of the Work and necessary for its proper completion. In such case, the Owner shall offset from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Consultant, Owner's staff and legal counsel's additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The Contractor shall continue performance of the Contract to the extent not terminated.

(2) Except with respect to defaults of Subcontractors, the Contractor shall not be liable

for any excess costs if the failure to perform the Contract arises out of causes beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor may be liable. Such causes may include, but are not limited to, acts of God or of the public enemy, acts of the Owner or federal government in either their sovereign or contractual capacity, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes, and unusually severe weather; but in every case the failure to perform must be beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor may be liable. If the failure to perform is caused by the default of a Subcontractor, and if such default arises out of causes beyond the control of both the Contractor and the Subcontractor, and without the fault or negligence of either of them or anyone for whom either may be liable, the Contractor shall not be liable for any excess costs for failure to perform unless the supplies or services to be furnished by the Subcontractor were obtainable from other sources in sufficient time to permit the Contractor to meet the required delivery or completion schedule.

13.2.3 ITEMS REQUIRED TO BE TRANSFERRED OR DELIVERED. The Owner may

require the Contractor to transfer title and deliver to the Owner, in the manner and to the extent directed by the Owner:

(1) Any completed portion of the Work; and

(2) Any partially completed portion of the Work and any parts, tools, dies, jigs,

fixtures, drawings, information, and contract rights (hereinafter called "construction materials") as the Contractor has specifically produced or specifically acquired for the performance of such part of this Contract as has been terminated; and the Contractor shall, upon direction of the Owner, protect and preserve property in the possession of the Contractor in which the Owner has an interest.

13.2.4 PAYMENT. When the Owner terminates the Contract for one or more of the reasons

stated in Subparagraph 13.2.1, the Owner may withhold payment and/or pursue all available remedies.

USU FORM 052002 48

13.2.5 OWNER PROTECTION IF LIENABLE. When the subject property is lienable, the Owner may withhold from amounts otherwise due the Contractor for such completed Work or construction materials such sum as the Owner determines to be necessary to protect the Owner against loss because of outstanding liens or claims for former lien holders.

13.2.6 CREDITS AND DEFICITS. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the full

cost of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Consultant's services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such cost exceeds the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner obligation for payment shall survive the termination of the Contract.

13.2.7 IF CONTRACTOR FOUND NOT IN DEFAULT OR EXCUSABLE. If, after

notice of termination of the Contract under the provisions of this clause, it is determined for any reason that the Contractor was not in default under the provisions of this clause, or that the default was excusable under the provisions of this clause, the rights and obligations of the parties shall be the same as if the notice of termination had been issued pursuant to the termination for convenience provisions.

13.2.8 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES NOT EXCLUSIVE. The rights and remedies of the

Owner provided in this Paragraph 13.2 shall not be exclusive and are in addition to any other rights and remedies provided by law or under this Contract.

13.3 SUSPENSION, DELAY OR INTERRUPTION OF WORK BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE.

13.3.1 BY OWNER IN WRITING. The Owner may in writing and without cause, order the

Contractor to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine to be appropriate for the convenience of the Owner.

13.3.2 TIME PERIOD FOR CLAIMS. Any Claim by the Contractor for adjustment under

this Paragraph 13.3 must be asserted by the Contractor, in writing, within twenty-one (21) days from the date of termination of such suspension, delay or interruption; provided that the Owner may, in its sole discretion, receive and act upon any such Claim asserted at any time prior to final payment under this Contract.

13.3.3 ADJUSTMENTS. Any adjustment in Contract Sum and Time shall be in accordance

with Articles 3, 4, and 7.

13.4 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE OF THE OWNER.

13.4.1 IN GENERAL. The performance of Work under this Contract may be terminated by the Owner in accordance with this Paragraph 13.4 in whole, or from time to time, in part, whenever the Owner shall determine that such termination is in the best interest of the Owner or any person for whom the Owner is acting under this Contract. Any such termination shall be effected by delivery to the Contractor of a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the Contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective.

13.4.2 CONTRACTOR OBLIGATIONS. After receipt of a notice of termination, and except

as otherwise directed by the Owner in writing, the Contractor shall:

of termination; (1) Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified in the notice

USU FORM 052002 49

(2) Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services or facilities, except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the Work under the Contract as is not terminated;

(3) Terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to performance

of Work terminated by the notice of termination;

(4) Assign to the Owner in the manner, at the times, and to the extent directed by the Owner, all of the right, title and interest of the Contractor under the orders and subcontracts so terminated, in which case the Owner shall have the right, in its discretion, to settle or pay any or all claims arising out of the termination of such orders and subcontracts;

(5) Settle all outstanding liabilities and all claims arising out of such termination of

orders and subcontracts, with the approval or ratification of the Owner, which approval or ratification shall be final for all the purposes of this Paragraph 13.4;

(6) Transfer title and deliver to the Owner in the manner, at the times, and to the

extent, if any, directed by the Owner:

(a) The fabricated or unfabricated parts, work in process, completed work, supplies, and other material produced as a part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of the Work terminated by the notice of termination; and

(b) The completed or partially completed drawings, information, and other

property which, if the Contract had been completed, would have been required to be furnished to the Owner;

(7) Use best efforts to sell, in the manner, at the times, to the extent, and at the price or

prices directed or authorized by the Owner, any property of the types referred to in Subparagraph 13.4.2(6) above; provided, however, that the Contractor:

(a) Shall not be required to extend credit to any purchaser; and

(b) May acquire any such property under the conditions prescribed by and at a

price or prices approved by the Owner; and provided further that the proceeds of any such transfer of or disposition shall be applied in reduction of any payments to be made by the Owner to the Contractor under this Contract or shall otherwise be credited to the price or cost of the Work covered by this Contract or paid in such other manner as the Owner may direct;

(8) Complete performance of such part of the Work as shall not have been terminated

by the notice of termination; and

(9) Take such action as may be necessary, or as the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the property related to this Contract which is in the possession of the Contractor in which the Owner has or may acquire an interest.

13.4.3 TERMINATION CLAIM. After receipt of a notice of termination, the Contractor shall

submit to the Owner a termination claim, in the form and with certification prescribed by the Owner. Such claim shall be submitted promptly but in no event not later than sixty (60) days from the effective date of termination.

13.4.4 AGREED UPON PAYMENT. Subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.4.3 above, the

Contractor and the Owner may agree upon the amount to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the total or partial termination of Work pursuant to this Paragraph 13.4.

USU FORM 052002 50

13.4.5 PAYMENT NOT AGREED UPON. In the event of the failure of the Contractor and the Owner to agree, as provided in Subparagraph 13.4.4, upon the whole amount to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the termination of Work pursuant to this Paragraph 13.4, the Owner shall pay to the Contractor the amounts determined by the Owner as follows, but without duplication of any amounts agreed upon in accordance with Subparagraph 13.4.4:

(1) With respect to all Contract Work performed prior to effective date of the notice of

termination, the total (without duplication of any items) of:

(a) The cost of such Work including undisputed Claim amounts;

(b) The cost of terminating, settling and paying claims arising out of the termination of Work under subcontracts or orders as provided in Subparagraph 13.4.2(5) above, exclusive of the amounts paid or payable on account of supplies or materials delivered or services furnished by Subcontractors prior to the effective date of the notice of termination under this Contract, which amounts shall be included in the cost on account of which payment is made under 13.4.5(1)(a) above;

(c) A sum, as overhead and profit on 13.4.5(1)(a) above, determined by the

Owner to be fair and reasonable;

(d) The reasonable cost of the preservation and protection of property incurred pursuant to Paragraph 13.4.2(9); and any other reasonable cost incidental to termination of Work under this Contract, including expenses incidental to the determination of the amount due to the Contractor as the result of the termination of Work under this Contract.

(2) The total sum to be paid to the Contractor under 13.4.5(1) above shall not exceed

the total Contract Sum as reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made and as further reduced by the Contract price of work not terminated. Except for normal spoilage, and except to the extent that the Owner shall have otherwise expressly assumed the risk of loss, there shall be excluded from the amounts payable to the Contractor under 13.4.5(1) above, the fair value of property which is destroyed, lost, stolen, or damaged so as to become undeliverable to the Owner, or to a buyer pursuant to Subparagraph 13.4.2(7).

13.4.6 DEDUCTIONS. In arriving at the amount due the Contractor under this Paragraph 13.4,

there shall be deducted:

(1) All unliquidated advance or other payments on account theretofore made to the Contractor, applicable to the terminated portion of this Contract;

(2) Any Claim which the Owner may have against the Contractor in connection with

this Contract; and

(3) The agreed price for, or the proceeds of sale of, any materials, supplies, or other things acquired by the Contractor or sold, pursuant to the provisions of this clause, and not otherwise recovered by or credited to the Owner.

13.4.7 PARTIAL TERMINATION. If the termination hereunder be partial, the Contractor may

file with the Owner a Claim for an equitable adjustment of the amounts specified in the Contract relating to the continued portion of the Contract and such equitable adjustment as may be agreed upon shall be made in such amounts. Any Claim by the Contractor for an equitable adjustment under this Subparagraph 13.4.7 must be filed within sixty (60) days from the effective date of the notice of termination.

13.4.8 PARTIAL PAYMENTS. The Owner may, from time to time, under such terms and

conditions as it may prescribe, make partial payments and payments on account against costs incurred by the Contractor in connection with the terminated portion of this Contract whenever, in the opinion of the

USU FORM 052002 51

Owner the aggregate of such payments shall be within the amount to which the Contractor will be entitled hereunder. If the total of such payments is in excess of the amount finally agreed or determined to be due under this Paragraph 14.4, such excess shall be payable by the Contractor to the Owner upon demand, together with interest at a rate equal to the average rate at the time being received from the investment of state funds, as determined by the State Treasurer, for the period until the date such excess is repaid to the Owner; provided, however, that no interest shall be charged with respect to any such excess payment attributable to a reduction in the Contractor's claim by reason of retention or other disposition of termination inventory until ten (10) days after the date of such retention or disposition, or such later date as determined by the Owner by reason of the circumstances.

13.4.9 PRESERVE AND MAKE AVAILABLE RECORDS. Unless otherwise provided for

in this Contract, or by applicable statute, the Contractor shall, from the effective date of termination until the expiration of three years after final settlement under this Contract, preserve and make available to the Owner at all reasonable times at the office of the Contractor, but without direct charge to the Owner, all books, records, documents and other evidence bearing on the costs and expenses of the Contractor under this Contract and relating to the Work terminated hereunder, or, to the extent approved by the Contracting officer, photographs, micrographs, or other authentic reproductions thereof.

13.5 OWNERS RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK. If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 9.4 or fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity.

Sparano + Mooney Architecture

Architect’s Supplemental Instruction (A.S.I) # 01 Project:

Owner:

Utah State University 6605 Old Main Hill Logan, Utah 84322-6605

Phone: Contact:

Architect: Sparano + Mooney Architecture 57 West 2100 Salt Lake City, Utah 84115

Phone: Contact:

Contractor: Phone: Contact:

Date of Issuance:

The work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions in accordance with the Contract Documents. If the Contractor finds the Work described herein to require a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time the Contractor shall provide a Proposed Change Order (PCO) per the DFCM General Conditions section 7.6. Item #1

Attachments:

• Issued by: SMA Inc. Project Architect:

Sparano + Mooney Architecture

Sparano + Mooney Architecture

Proposal Request (PR) #01 Project:

Owner:

Utah State University 6605 Old Main Hill Logan, Utah 84322-6605

Phone: Contact:

Architect: Sparano + Mooney Architecture 57 West 2100 Salt Lake City, Utah 84115

Phone: Contact:

Contractor: Phone: Contact:

Date of Issuance:

Provide Cost Credit and Additions for the items noted below for review and approval by the Owner and Architect prior to proceeding with the work. Item #1 Attachments:

• none

Issued by: SMA Inc Project Architect:

Sparano + Mooney Architecture

TC-721GRev. 3/16

Utah State Tax Commission

Exemption Certificate for Governments & Schools(Sales, Use, Tourism and Motor Vehicle Rental Tax)

Name of institution claiming exemption (purchaser) Telephone Number

Street Address City State ZIP Code

Authorized Signature Name (please print) Title

Name of Seller or Supplier: Date

The person signing this certificate MUST check the applicable box showing the basis for which the exemption is being claimed.

Email questions to taxmaster@utah.gov. You may also write or visit the Tax Commission at 210 N 1950 W, Salt Lake City, UT 84134, or call 801-297-2200 or toll free 1-800-662-4335.

DO NOT SEND THIS CERTIFICATE TO THE TAX COMMISSIONKeep it with your records in case of an audit.

❑ UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT OR NATIVE AMERICAN TRIBEI certify the tangible personal property or services purchased are to be paid directly with funds from the entity noted on this form and will be used in the exercise of essential governmental or tribal functions. NOTE: Includes sales of tangible personal property to federally chartered credit unions. “Directly” does not include per diem, entity advances, or government reimbursements for employee credit card purchases.

❑ CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS PURCHASED FOR SCHOOLS OR PUBLIC TRANSIT DISTRICTSI certify the construction materials purchased are on behalf of a public elementary or secondary school, or public transit district. I further certify the purchased construction materials will be installed or converted into real property owned by the school or public transit district.Name of school or public transit district: ________________________________Name of project: _______________________

❑ FOREIGN DIPLOMATI certify the purchases are authorized by a diplomatic tax exemption card issued by the United States.Foreign diplomat number: ___________________

❑ UTAH LOCAL GOVERNMENTS AND PUBLIC ELEMENTARY AND SECONDARY SCHOOLSSales Tax License No. ________________I certify the tangible personal property or services purchased are to be paid directly with funds from the entity noted on this form and will be used in the exercise of that entity’s essential functions. For construction materials, if the purchaser is a Utah local government, these construction materials will be installed or converted into real property by employees of this government entity. CAUTION: This exemption does not apply to government or educa-tional entities of other states and is not valid for lodging-related purchases.

❑ UTAH STATE GOVERNMENTSales Tax License No. ________________I certify the tangible personal property or services purchased are to be paid directly with funds from the entity noted on this form and will be used in the exercise of its essential functions. For construction materials, they will be installed or converted into real property by employees of this government entity.CAUTION: This exemption does not apply to other states and is not valid for lodging-related purchases.

❑ HEBER VALLEY HISTORIC RAILROADI certify these purchases and sales are by the Heber Valley Historic Railroad Authority or its operators and are related to the operation and maintenance of the Heber Valley Historic Railroad.

To be valid this certificate must be filled in completely, including a check mark in the proper box.

A sales tax license number is required only where indicated.

Please sign, date and, if applicable, include your license or exemption number.

NOTE TO SELLER: Keep this certificate on file since it must be available for audit review.

NOTE TO PURCHASER: Keep a copy of this certificate for your records. You must notify the seller of cancellation, modification, or limitation of the exemption you have claimed.

If you need an accommodation under the Americans with Disabilities Act, email taxada@utah.gov, or call 801-297-3811 or TDD 801-297-2020. Please allow three working days for a response.

DO NOT SEND THIS CERTIFICATE TO THE TAX COMMISSION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 1

SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 PROJECT

A. Project Name: USU Cain College of the Arts, Academic Advising Center Renovation.

B. Owner's Name: Utah State University Facilities.

C. Architect's Name: Sparano + Mooney Architecture.

D. Architect's Consultants: Refer to Section 00 0102 - Project Directory.

E. The Project consists of the demolition and renovation of selective areas of the existing Academic Advising Center, including plumbing, mechanical, and electrical work.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORKA. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents.

B. The Project is Tax Exempt, refer to Section 00 7300 - Supplementary Conditions.

1.03 CONTRACT DESCRIPTIONA. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on Fixed Limit of Construction Costs (FLCC) as

described in the Owner provided CM/GC Agreement.

1.04 DESCRIPTION OF DEMOLITION WORKA. Scope of demolition and removal work is indicated on drawings and specified in Section 02

4100.

1.05 OWNER OCCUPANCYA. Owner intends to continue to occupy adjacent portions of the existing building during the entire

construction period.

B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations.

C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

1.06 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISESA. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings.

1. Contract Limits: The limits of responsibility for the Contractor and Architect to include all impacted adjacent university property including landscape areas, sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and utilities. Such extended areas will be shown on the drawings and indicated that the Contractor has responsibility to maintain and restore affected areas.

B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow:1. Owner occupancy.2. Work by Owner.3. Use of site and premises by the public.

C. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open

during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered.

2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruptions with USU Facilities Design and Construction. Radios and other devices will not be permitted on-site.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 2

E. Site Dust Control: Site dust control is required per EPA regulations.

F. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the new building or within 25 feet of any entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

G. Controlled Substances: Use of alcohol, and other controlled substances on project site is not permitted.

H. Contractors performing work for USU are subject to federal and state laws regarding affirmative action, equal employment opportunity, and sexual harassment.

I. Project Utility Sources:1. Temporary Utilities: The Contractor shall make arrangements with available utility(s) for

temporary connections and bear all costs for these utilities. On the campus proper and some peripheral areas the utilities are University utilities and the contractor shall make arrangements through FD&C for connections. The Contractor shall provide and install meters for measuring use of utilities purchased from Utah State University. FD&C shall read or have the meters read at the beginning of the project, monthly, and at the end of the project. The contractor shall be responsible for all utility costs including those from the University.

J. Utility Outages and Shutdown:1. Contractors are required to give 7 days' advance notice in writing to USU Facilities Design

and Construction.2. Do not disrupt or shut down life safety systems, including but not limited to fire sprinklers

and fire alarm system, without 7 days notice to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.3. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other facilities.

1.07 WORK SEQUENCEA. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USEDEND OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01 2000 - 1

SECTION 01 2000 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments.

B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time.

C. Change procedures.

D. Correlation of Contractor submittals based on changes.

E. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 00 6000 - Project Forms: Forms to be used.

B. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions - Provided by Owner: Additional requirements for progress payments, final payment, changes in the Work.

C. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of schedules.

D. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUESA. Coordinate preparation of schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction

schedule.1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms

and schedules, including the following:a. Application for Payment.b. Submittal Schedule.c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect and USU Representative at earliest

possible date, but no later than seven days before the first submittal of Application for Payment.

3. When the Schedule of Values is approved by the Architect and USU Representative it will be the basis for future Contractor Applications for Payments. The Contractor will not be entitled to payment until receipt and acceptance of the Schedule of Values.

B. Format and Content: The Schedule of Values to be submitted on the form provided.1. Use Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish line items.2. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

3. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.4. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required

include evidence of insurance.5. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each

subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01 2000 - 2

6. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicated Owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.

7. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment to be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-

in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

C. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

D. Use Schedule of Values Form: AIA G703, edition stipulated in the Agreement.

1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTSA. Payment Period: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement. The

period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

B. Use Form AIA G732 and Form AIA G703, edition stipulated in the Agreement.

C. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without notice.1. Entries to match data on the approved Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction

Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.2. Include amounts of work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether

or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicated separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-request project acceleration.

D. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of

surety to payment, for stored materials.2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.

Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous

Applications for Payment.b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for

Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and

remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

E. Submit one signed and notarized original copy of each Application for Payment to the Architect.1. Include the following with the application:

a. Transmittal letter as specified for submittals in Section 01 3000.b. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 3000.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01 2000 - 3

c. Current construction photographs specified in Section 01 3000.d. Partial release of liens from major subcontractors and vendors.e. Subcontractor payment waivers.f. Project record documents as specified in Section 01 7800, for review by Owner which

will be returned to the Contractor.g. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products.

2. Construction Progress Schedules: Provide schedule with each Application for Payment. Applications for Payment without schedule will not be processed. The Contractor will deliver this application and schedule to the Architect who will verify accuracy and amount completed. The Architect will then transmit application and schedule to the USU FD&C Construction Coordinator for approval and payment.

F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application of Payment include the following:1. List of subcontractors.2. Schedule of Values.3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary, if not final).4. Submittal Schedule (preliminary, if not final).5. Report from preconstruction conference.

G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completions, submit and Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.2. Verify requirements specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract.

1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURESA. Changes in the Work may be accomplished after the execution of the Contract by Change

Order, Construction Change Directive or Architect's Supplemental Instructions. Subject to requirements in General Conditions. The Contractor must have a written Modification executed by USU prior to preceding with any Work sought to be an extra.

B. Minor Changes in the Work: For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Architect will issue supplemental instructions directly to Contractor.1. Form: Architect's Supplemental Instructions (ASI), included in Section 00 6000 - Project

Forms.

C. Construction Change Directive: For other required changes, Architect will issue a document signed by Owner instructing Contractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of

determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.2. Promptly execute the change.3. Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required. After completion

of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

4. Form: Construction Change Directive, included in Section 00 6000 - Project Forms.

D. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Architect will issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor shall prepare and submit an estimated price quotation within 20 days.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01 2000 - 4

1. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

2. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

3. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.4. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicated the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

5. Form: Architect's Proposal Request (APR), included in Section 00 6000 - Project Forms.

E. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01 6000.1. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

2. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

3. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.4. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicated the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

5. Form: Proposal Request Form, included in Section 00 6000 - Project Forms.

F. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract.

G. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.1. Form: Change Order, Section 00 6000 - Project Forms.

H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum.

I. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit.

J. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.

1.06 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENTA. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total

adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due.

B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished:1. All closeout procedures specified in Section 01 7000.2. Requirements from General Conditions have been met.3. Evidence has been provided that all claims have been settled.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01 2000 - 5

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USEDEND OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

01 2000 - 6

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 1

SECTION 01 2500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Instructions to Bidders: Restrictions on timing of substitution requests.

B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures, coordination.

C. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Fundamental product requirements, product options, delivery, storage, and handling.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. CSI/CSC Form 1.5C - Substitution Request (During the Bidding/Negotiating Stage); Current

Edition.

B. CSI/CSC Form 13.1A - Substitution Request (After the Bidding/Negotiating Phase); Current Edition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. A Substitution Request for products, assemblies, materials, and equipment constitutes a representation that the submitter:1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality

level of the specified product, equipment, assembly, or system.2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.3. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for

the work to be complete, with no additional cost to Owner.4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become

apparent.

B. A Substitution Request for specified installer constitutes a representation that the submitter:1. Has acted in good faith to obtain services of specified installer, but was unable to come to

commercial, or other terms.

C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer.

D. Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request, and information necessary to provide an actionable response.1. Forms indicated and included in the Project Manual are adequate for this purpose, and

must be used.

E. Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item.1. Submit an electronic document, combining the request form with supporting data into

single document.

3.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING PROCUREMENTA. Submittal Form (before award of contract):

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 2

1. Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 1.5C - Substitution Request (During the Bidding/Negotiating Stage). See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable.

B. Owner will consider requests for substitutions only if submitted at least 7 days prior to the date for receipt of bids.

3.03 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING CONSTRUCTIONA. Submittal Form (after award of contract):

1. Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 13.1A - Substitution Request. See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable.

B. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date of Agreement.

C. Submit request for Substitution for Cause within 14 days of discovery of need for substitution, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on approved project schedule.

D. Submit request for Substitution for Convenience immediately upon discovery of its potential advantage to the project, but not later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on approved project schedule.1. In addition to meeting general documentation requirements, document how the requested

substitution benefits the Owner through cost savings, time savings, greater energy conservation, or in other specific ways.

2. Document means of coordinating of substitution item with other portions of the work, including work by affected subcontractors.

3. Bear the costs engendered by proposed substitution of:a. Owner's compensation to the Architect for any required redesign, time spent

processing and evaluating the request.

E. Substitutions will not be considered under one or more of the following circumstances:1. When they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without

having received prior approval.2. Without a separate written request.

3.04 RESOLUTIONA. Architect may request additional information and documentation prior to rendering a decision.

Provide this data in an expeditious manner.

B. Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.1. Architect's decision following review of proposed substitution will be noted on the

submitted form.

3.05 ACCEPTANCEA. Accepted substitutions change the work of the Project. They will be documented and

incorporated into work of the project by Change Order, Construction Change Directive, Architectural Supplementary Instructions, or similar instruments provided for in the Conditions of the Contract.

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIESA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. Include completed Substitution Request Forms as part of the Project record. Include both approved and rejected Requests.

END OF SECTION

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST

(During the Bidding Phase) Project:

To: Re:

Substitution Request Number: ____________________________ From: Date: A/E Project Number: Contract For:

Specification Title: Description:

Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, and performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The Undersigned certifies: Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the

substitution. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address:

Telephone: A/E’s REVIEW AND ACTION

Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date:

Supporting Data Attached: Drawings X Product Data Samples Tests Reports © Copyright 1996, Construction Specifications Institute, 99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 300 Alexandria, VA 22314

Page of September 1996 CSI Form 1.5C

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST

(After the Bidding Phase) Project: To: Re:

Substitution Request Number: From: Date: A/E Project Number: Contract For:

Specification Title: Description:

Section: Page: Article/Paragraph:

Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone History: New product 2-5 years old X 5-10 years old More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product: X Point-by-point comparative data attached Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation:

Project: Architect:

Address: Owner:

Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: X No Yes; explain Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ). Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: No Yes [Add] [Deduct] days.

Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports © Copyright 1996, Construction Specification Institute, 99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 300 Alexandria, VA 22314

Page of September 1996 CSI Form 13.1A

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST

(Continued) The Undersigned certifies: Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become

apparent are to be waived. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the

substitution. Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments: A/E’s REVIEW AND ACTION

Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: Contractor Subcontractor Supplier Manufacturer A/E

Copyright 1996, Construction Specification Institute, 99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 300 Alexandria, VA 22314

Page of September 1996 CSI Form 13.1A

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 1

SECTION 01 3000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General coordination procedures.

B. Electronic document submittals.

C. Preconstruction meeting.

D. Preinstallation meetings.

E. Progress meetings.

F. Project closeout meeting.

G. Progress photographs.

H. Coordination drawings.

I. Requests for Information (RFIs).

J. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.1. General information only, refer to sections below for detailed submittal requirements.

a. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements.b. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.c. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.d. Individual Project Sections.

K. Number of copies of submittals.

L. Requests for Interpretation (RFI) procedures.

M. Submittal procedures.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions: Dates for applications for payment and

duties of the General Contractor.

B. Section 01 3216 - Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of schedules.

C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.

D. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents; operation and maintenance data; warranties and bonds.

1.03 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURESA. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Project

Manual to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 2

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.2. Preparation of the schedule of values.3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.4. Delivery and processing of submittals.5. Progress meetings.6. Preinstallation conferences.7. Project closeout activities.8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

D. Project Coordinator: Construction Manager.1. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field

offices and sheds, for traffic access, traffic, and parking facilities.2. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator.3. Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications;

submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts.

4. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. Responsibility for providing temporary utilities and construction facilities is identified in Section 01 1000 - Summary.

5. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator.6. Make the following types of submittals to Architect through the Project Coordinator:

a. Requests for Interpretation.b. Requests for substitution.c. Shop drawings, product data, and samples.d. Test and inspection reports.e. Design data.f. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports.g. Applications for payment and change order requests.h. Progress schedules.i. Coordination drawings.j. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.k. Closeout submittals.

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated

into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 3

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF) format and emailed to Architect.1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to

Requests for Interpretation (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, Contractor's correction punchlist, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record.

2. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in allowable format.3. Users need an email address, Internet access, and PDF review software that includes

ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat, www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com).

4. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed.5. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that

electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts.

3.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETINGA. Schedule and conduct a preconstruction meeting before starting construction, at a time

convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

B. Attendees:1. Authorized representatives of the Owner.2. USU FD&C Construction Coordinator.3. Architect and their consultants.4. Contractor and it's superintendent.5. Major subcontractors and suppliers.6. Other concerned parties.7. Participants at the meeting to be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters

relating to the Work.

C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:1. Tentative construction schedule.2. Phasing.3. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.4. Designation of key personnel and their duties.5. Lines of communications.6. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.7. Procedures for RFIs.8. Procedures for testing and inspecting.9. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.10. Distribution of the Contract Documents.11. Submittal procedures12. Preparation of record documents.13. Use of the premises.14. Work restrictions.15. Working hours.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 4

16. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.17. Office, work, and storage areas.18. First aid.19. Security.20. Progress cleaning

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGSA. Conduct a preinstallation meeting at Project Site before each construction activity that requires

coordination with other construction.1. Attendees:

a. Authorized representatives of the Owner.b. USU FD&C Construction Coordinator.c. Architect.d. Special Consultants.e. Contractor's Superintendent.f. Installers.g. Manufacturers and/or fabricators.h. Others involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration

with other materials that preceded or will follow.2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:a. Contract Documents.b. Options.c. Related RFIs.d. Related Change Orders.e. Submittals.f. Review of mockups.g. Possible conflicts.h. Compatibility requirements.i. Time schedules.j. Weather limitations.k. Manufacturer's written instructions.l. Warranty requirements.m. Compatibility of materials.n. Acceptability of substrates.o. Temporary facilities and controls.p. Space and access limitations.q. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.r. Testing and inspecting requirements.s. Installation procedures.t. Coordination with other work.u. Required performance results.v. Protection of adjacent work.w. Protection of construction and personnel.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 5

B. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.1. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.2. Do not proceed with installation if the meeting cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate

whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

3.04 PROGRESS MEETINGSA. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum weekly

intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.1. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at

meetings and take minutes of the meetings.a. Distribute copies of the agenda and minutes to the Architect and USU FD&C prior to

each meeting.

B. Attendees:1. Authorized representatives of the Owner.2. USU FD&C Construction Coordinator.3. Architect.4. Special Consultants.5. Contractor's Superintendent.6. Installers.7. Manufacturers and/or fabricators.8. Entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or

performance of future activities.9. Participants at the meeting to be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters

relating to the Work.

C. Agenda:1. Review and correct or approve minutes of previous meetings.2. Review of Work progress since last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time,

ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.6. Review of RFIs and proposal requests.7. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.8. Maintenance of progress schedule.9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.10. Coordination of projected progress.11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.13. Other business relating to work.

D. Record minutes and distribute copies with two days after meeting to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 6

1. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

3.05 PROJECT CLOSEOUT MEETINGA. Schedule and conduct a project closeout meeting, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect,

but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project

closeout.

B. Attendees:1. Authorized representatives of the Owner.2. USU FD&C Construction Coordinator.3. Architect and their consultants.4. Contractor and it's superintendent.5. Major subcontractors and suppliers.6. Other concerned parties.7. Participants at the meeting to be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters

relating to the Work.

C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:1. Preparation of record documents.2. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection

for acceptance.3. Submittal of written warranties.4. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.5. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.6. Requirements for demonstration and training.7. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.8. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for

final payment.9. Submittal procedures.10. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.11. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.12. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

D. Record minutes and distribute copies with two days after meeting to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.06 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHSA. Submit photographs with each application for payment, taken not more than 3 days prior to

submission of application for payment.

B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files.

C. Provide photographs of construction throughout progress of Work produced by an experienced photographer, acceptable to Architect.

D. Views:1. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required.2. Provide factual presentation.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 7

3. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of field, and minimum distortion.

4. Point of View Sketch: Provide sketch identifying point of view of each photograph.

E. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide files unaltered by photo editing software.1. Delivery Medium: Via email.2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification.3. Point of View Sketch: Include digital copy of point of view sketch with each electronic

submittal; include point of view identification in each photo file name.4. PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos per

page, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal.

3.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGSA. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in

individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate

and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable.a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare

sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review.

c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

f. Indicate required installation sequences.g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and

mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 8

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including

insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors,

cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger.b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm

locations.c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor

control center locations.d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating

system as original Drawings.2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File

(PDF) format.3. Architect will furnish contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing

coordination digital data files.a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data files as they relate to Drawings.b. Contractor will execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement included

in Section 00 6000 - Project Forms.

3.08 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATIONA. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the

Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor

with no response.2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 9

1. RFI number, numbered sequentially.2. RFI subject.3. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.4. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.5. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.6. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.7. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

C. RFI Form: Request for Information Form included in Section 00 6000 - Project Forms.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.b. Requests for approval of substitutions.c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 2000 - Price and Payment Procedures.a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly.1. Form: Use CSI RFI Log Form 13.2B or form approved by Architect.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect with 7 days if Contractor disagrees with response.1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

3.09 GENERAL INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each

portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design.1. Form: Use CSI Subcontractors and Major Material Suppliers Form 1.5A or form approved

by Architect.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 10

Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each

temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

3.10 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEWA. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:

1. Product data.2. Shop drawings.3. Samples for selection.4. Samples for verification.

B. Contactor to review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

C. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for general conformance with the design concept and the information given in the Construction Documents. Corrections or comments made on the submittal during this review do not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Review of a specific item shall not include review of an assembly of which the item is a component. The Contractor is responsible for quantities; dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the jobsite; information that pertains solely to the fabrication processes or to the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction; coordination of the Work with that of all other trades and performing all Work in a safe and satisfactory manner. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicated action.

D. Samples will be reviewed for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.

E. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.

3.11 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATIONA. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:

1. Design data.2. Certificates.3. Test reports.4. Inspection reports.5. Manufacturer's instructions.6. Manufacturer's field reports.7. Other types indicated.

B. Contactor to review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

C. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.

3.12 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUTA. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.

B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.

C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout in compliance with requirements of Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 11

1. Project record documents.2. Operation and maintenance data.3. Warranties.4. Bonds.5. Other types as indicated.

D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.

3.13 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALSA. Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up

file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected.1. Email files directly to Architect.2. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal

requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

3. File name to use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

B. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be retained by Architect.1. Transmit samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.2. Provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file

illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.3. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.

3.14 GENERAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESA. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates

required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and

Contractor's construction schedule.2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include

submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for

submittals.

B. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. Coordinate with Owner for items to be reviewed concurrently by Owner's Facility Team.

C. Shop Drawing Procedures:1. Do not reproduce the Contract Documents to create shop drawings.2. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract

Drawings for use in preparing shop drawings.a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital

data files as they relate to Drawings.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 12

b. Contractor will execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement included in Section 00 6000 - Project Forms.

D. Transmittals:1. Transmittal Form: Form provided in Section 00 6000 - Project Forms.2. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a

sequential alphabetic suffix.3. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail

number, and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.4. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of

Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

E. Review Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.1. Initial Review: allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. Allow

additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.4. Concurrent Consultant and Owner Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that

submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect, Architect's consultants, and Owner's Representatives, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

F. Concurrent Submittals to Owner: The following submittals (shop drawings, product data, and samples) shall be given to the USU FD&C Project Coordinator for review simultaneously with the Architect and Architect's consultants review. USU FD&C will maintain this set and transmit comments to the Architects and Architect's consultants for their incorporation into any review set that is approved. One copy of the stamped approved set shall be sent to the USU FD&C Project Coordinator.1. Finish hardware.2. Floor coverings.3. Paint samples and color schedules.4. Fire protections systems.5. Electrical.6. Mechanical.

G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.

H. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.

I. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with requirements.

J. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.

3.15 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICESA. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a

design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a

written request for additional information to Architect.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 13

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

01 3000 - 14

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

01 3216 - 1

SECTION 01 3216 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Preliminary schedule.

B. Construction progress schedule, with network analysis diagram and reports.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONSA. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Work sequence, occupancy, and owner-furnished items.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. Within 10 days after date established in Notice to Proceed, submit preliminary schedule

defining planned operations for the first 90 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.

B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.

C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for review.1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed

schedule.2. Include written letter clearly indicating the dates that the Owner is to furnish any materials,

equipment, or the like, to be incorporated into the Work by the Contractor.

D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.

E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment to Architect. Applications for Payment without schedule will not be processed.

F. At each scheduled meeting with the Owner's Representative the Contractor shall provide a "three week look ahead" with long lead items identified.

G. Submit under transmittal letter form specified in Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements.

H. Format for Submittals:1. PDF electronic file and one paper copy.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Scheduler: Contractor's personnel or specialist Consultant specializing in CPM scheduling with

two years minimum experience in scheduling construction work of a complexity comparable to this Project, and having use of computer facilities capable of delivering a detailed graphic printout within 48 hours of request.

1.05 SCHEDULE FORMATA. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each

activity with the applicable specification section number.

B. Diagram Sheet Size: Maximum 22 x 17 inches (560 x 432 mm).

C. Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

01 3216 - 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE

A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a preliminary network diagram.

3.02 CONTENTA. The schedule shall include contractually specified interim completion dates and milestones.

B. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction.

C. Identify each item by specification section number.

D. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities.

E. Provide sub-schedules for each phase of Work identified in Section 01 1000.

F. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of the entire schedule.

G. Include conferences and meetings in schedule.

H. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work completed, as of the first day of each month.

I. Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples, owner-furnished products, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from Architect. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes.

J. Indicate delivery dates for owner-furnished products.

K. Coordinate content with schedule of values specified in Section 01 2000 - Price and Payment Procedures.

L. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.

3.03 NETWORK ANALYSISA. Prepare network analysis diagrams and supporting mathematical analyses using the Critical

Path Method. The CPM schedule shall be developed using Primavera, MS Project, or Suretrack unless otherwise authorized by the Owner's Representative.

B. Illustrate order and interdependence of activities and sequence of work; how start of a given activity depends on completion of preceding activities, and how completion of the activity may restrain start of subsequent activities.

C. Mathematical Analysis: Tabulate each activity of detailed network diagrams, using calendar dates, and identify for each activity:1. Preceding and following event numbers.2. Activity description.3. Estimated duration of activity, in maximum 14 day intervals.4. Earliest start date.5. Earliest finish date.6. Actual start date.7. Actual finish date.8. Latest start date.9. Latest finish date.10. Total and free float; float time shall accrue to Owner and to Owner's benefit.11. Monetary value of activity, keyed to Schedule of Values.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

01 3216 - 3

12. Percentage of activity completed.13. Responsibility.

D. Unless otherwise authorized by the Owner's Representative, no more than 40 percent of all activities may be identified as critical path items. The relationship between non-critical activities and activities on the critical path shall be clearly shown on the network diagram.

E. Required Reports: List activities in sorts or groups:1. By preceding work item or event number from lowest to highest.2. By amount of float, then in order of early start.3. By responsibility in order of earliest possible start date.4. In order of latest allowable start dates.5. In order of latest allowable finish dates.6. Contractor's periodic payment request sorted by Schedule of Values listings.7. Listing of basic input data that generates the report.8. Listing of activities on the critical path.

3.04 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULEA. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal.

B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule.

C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days.

3.05 UPDATING SCHEDULEA. Schedule shall be updated at least once a month and submitted with each pay request.

B. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.

C. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity.

D. Update diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work.

E. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable changes.

F. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.

G. Submit reports required to support recommended changes.

H. Provide narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on the schedule. Report corrective action taken or proposed and its effect including the effects of changes on schedules of separate contractors.

3.06 SCHEDULE RECOVERYA. If the Work represented by the critical path falls behind more than 7 days, the project schedule

shall be redone within 14 days showing how the Contractor shall recover the time. A narrative that addresses the changes in the schedule from the previously submitted schedule shall be submitted along with the schedule in both hard copy and electronic copy. The Contractor shall comply with the most recent schedules.

3.07 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULEA. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to subcontractors,

suppliers, Architect, Owner, and other concerned parties.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

01 3216 - 4

B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections indicated in schedules.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 1

SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Submittals.

B. Quality assurance.

C. References and standards.

D. Testing and inspection agencies and services.

E. Control of installation.

F. Tolerances.

G. Manufacturers' field services.

H. Defect Assessment.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by

public authorities.

B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.

C. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Designer's Qualification Statement: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator, or for Owner's information.1. Include information for each individual professional responsible for producing, or

supervising production of, design-related professional services provided by Contractor.a. Full name.b. Professional licensure information.c. Statement addressing extent and depth of experience specifically relevant to design

of items assigned to Contractor.

C. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents, or for Owner's information.1. Include calculations that have been used to demonstrate compliance to performance and

regulatory criteria provided, and to determine design solutions.2. Include required product data and shop drawings.3. Include a statement or certification attesting that design data complies with criteria

indicated, such as building codes, loads, functional, and similar engineering requirements.4. Include signature and seal of design professional responsible for allocated design services

on calculations and drawings.

D. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor.1. Include:

a. Date issued.b. Project title and number.c. Name of inspector.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 2

d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.e. Identification of product and specifications section.f. Location in the Project.g. Type of test/inspection.h. Date of test/inspection.i. Results of test/inspection.j. Compliance with Contract Documents.k. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of results.

2. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents, or for Owner's information.

E. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data.1. Indicate material or product complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be

acceptable to Architect.

F. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect for information.2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information

given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.

H. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing compliance with information

given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Architect

or Owner.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Prior to start of work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.

2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

3. Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing testing laboratory is accredited under IAS AC89.

B. Designer Qualifications: Where professional engineering design services and design data submittals are specifically required of Contractor by Contract Documents, provide services of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State of Utah.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 3

1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDSA. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not

included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Comply with reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.

D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion.

E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICESA. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified

testing and inspection.

B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Have work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.

3.02 TOLERANCESA. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.

Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 4

3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTIONA. See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required.

B. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:1. Date test or inspection was conducted.2. Description of Work tested or inspected.3. Date tests or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.5. Maintain log at Project Site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to

test and inspection log for Architect's, Commissioning Authority's, reference during normal working hours.

C. Testing Agency Duties:1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in

performance of services.2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified

standards.3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-compliance of

Work or products.5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect.6. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings if required by Owner.7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.

D. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract

Documents.2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.

E. Contractor Responsibilities:1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be

used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to

manufacturers' facilities.3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be

tested/inspected.c. To facilitate tests/inspections.d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services.

5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

F. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 5

G. Re-testing required because of non-compliance with specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor.

H. Repair and Protection: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements.

2. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.3. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.

3.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICESA. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or

manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations.1. Observer subject to approval of Architect and Owner.

C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENTA. Replace Work or portions of the Work not complying with specified requirements.

B. If, in the opinion of Architect and Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 6

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01 5000 - 1

SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. USU Campus Restrictions.

B. Temporary telecommunications services.

C. Temporary sanitary facilities.

D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.

E. Security requirements.

F. Vehicular access and parking.

G. Waste removal facilities and services.

H. Field offices.

I. Temporary fire protection.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2019b.

1.04 USU CAMPUS RESTRICTIONSA. Abide by all posted campus regulations in regard to traffic, parking, smoking, noise, etc.

B. All trash and recycling is to be hauled from campus to a legal disposal site. At no time shall on-site burning be allowed. Do not use University dumpsters for trash disposal.

C. Class schedules should be observed to avoid undue disturbances.

D. Parking permits are required for any parking outside the contract limit lines.

E. Contractors performing work for USU are subject to federal and state laws regarding affirmative action, equal employment opportunity, and sexual harassment.

F. During construction of the project the Contractor shall limit noise from the site as much as possible. Local sound ordinances are in effect. Coordinate with Facilities Design and Construction for appropriate times to use loud equipment such as jackhammers or shot-nailers. Radios and other devices will not be permitted on-site.

1.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES - SEE SECTION 01 5100

1.06 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICESA. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project

mobilization.

B. Within the University service area, hard line and/or data service is to be ordered through the local telephone company and then arranged for service to the construction site through on campus cables through the USU IT department.

C. Telecommunications services shall include:1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, with

necessary software and laser printer.2. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01 5000 - 2

3. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster.4. Email: Account/address reserved for project use.5. Facsimile Service: Fax-to-email software on personal computer.

1.07 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIESA. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.

B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.

C. At end of construction, return site to same or better condition as originally found.

1.08 TEMPORARY PEDESTRAIN ROUTINGA. When routing pedestrians around an area of construction, the Contractor shall provide

temporary walking surfaces across existing landscaped areas. These surfaces shall be constructed of a durable material with a slip-resistant surface. The use and placement of temporary walking surfaces shall be approved in advance by USU Facilities Design and Construction. The Contractor shall restore all landscaped areas damaged by the placement and use of the walkways. The Contractor shall also restore landscape damaged by pedestrians routed over existing landscape to avoid construction.

1.09 BARRIERSA. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas

that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way .

C. When pedestrians are routed around construction areas additional barricades will be required to prevent damage to adjacent landscaped areas. Barricades shall be placed to route pedestrians around affected areas using existing paved surfaces when possible.

D. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants.

E. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.

1.10 FENCINGA. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence.

B. Provide 6 foot (1.8 m) high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks.

C. Fences shall be installed on straight, true lines. Fencing shall not extend into pedestrian walkway, and shall not create a safety hazard. Gates shall be locked with the Contractor's lock and appropriate University locks in a manner to allow University emergency vehicle access at any time. University locks are obtainable from the University Police or Fire Marshal.

D. Upon completion of the Project the Contractor shall dismantle the fence and remove from Site.

1.11 INTERIOR ENCLOSURESA. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate work areas from Owner-

occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner-occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.

B. Construction: Framing and gypsum board sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces:1. Maximum flame spread rating of 25 in accordance with ASTM E84.

C. Paint surfaces exposed to view from Owner-occupied areas.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01 5000 - 3

1.12 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized

entry, vandalism, or theft.

B. Coordinate with University Police.

1.13 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKINGA. Indicate on the Construction Drawings access routes to job site through the campus for

concrete trucks, delivery trucks and other vehicles concerned with the project. Determine these routes with USU Facilities Design and Construction. Any damage to these areas shall be repaired by the Contractor upon completion of the project.

B. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and access for emergency vehicles.

C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.

D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.

E. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.

F. Parking permits are required for any parking outside the contract limit lines.

1.14 WASTE REMOVALA. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and

orderly condition.

B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly. Do not use USU dumpsters for trash disposal.

C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids.

E. No on-site burning allowed.

1.15 FIELD OFFICESA. Construction office for the use of the Owner, Architect, and Architect's Consultants shall be

provided by Contractor. Construction office shall include a table with 12 chairs, a plan rack, a plan table, and a two-drawer file. This office shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall have data, heat and air conditioning. It shall be maintained in clean condition.

B. Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet (10 m) from existing and new structures.

1.16 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTIONA. Until fire protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary

fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with IFC 906, "Code for Portable Fire Extinguishers", and IBC Chapter 33 and IFC Chapter 14 "Fire Safety During Construction".1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but

not less than one extinguisher on each floor.2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire protection

facilities. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire exposure areas.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01 5000 - 4

4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition

1.17 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLSA. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of Substantial

Completion inspection.

B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet (600 mm). Grade site as indicated.

C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.

D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USEDEND OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 5100 - 1

SECTION 01 5100 - TEMPORARY UTILITIES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Temporary Utilities: Provision of electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, and water.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls:

1. Temporary telecommunications services for administrative purposes.2. Temporary sanitary facilities required by law.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.

1.04 TEMPORARY PROJECT UTILITY SOURCESA. The Contractor shall make arrangements with available utilities for temporary connections and

bear all costs for these utilities. On the campus proper and some peripheral areas the utilities are University utilities and the Contractor shall make arrangements through USU Facility Design and Construction for connections. The Contractor shall provide and install meters for measuring use of utilities purchased from Utah State University. USU Facility Design and Construction shall read or have the meters read at the beginning of the project, monthly, and at the end of the project. The Contractor shall be responsible for all utility costs including those from the University.

1.05 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITYA. Cost: By Contractor.

B. Where commercial power is not readily available, Utah State University may at their option provide electric power to a temporary service. The Contractor shall provide his own services from the service drop disconnect. Meter readings at the time of meter installation shall be observed by the Contractor’s representative. When permanent electric power is installed in the building and the building system has been inspected and approved as operational, the temporary service may be removed at the Contractor’s request. Power system shall not be energized before the main switchboard is inspected by USU and the metering system is correctly installed.

C. The Contractor shall be billed for electrical power consumed on both the temporary and permanent power systems until final acceptance of the complete project.

D. Power Service Characteristics: 208 volt, three phase, four wire / 120 volt, single phase.

E. Complement existing power service capacity and characteristics as required.

F. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located at each floor. Provide flexible power cords as required.

G. Provide main service disconnect and over-current protection at convenient location .

H. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.

I. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting.1. Provide 20 ampere, duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools.2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 5100 - 2

1.06 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSESA. Provide and maintain LED, compact fluorescent, or high-intensity discharge lighting as suitable

for the application for construction operations in accordance with requirements of 29 CFR 1926 and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft (10.8 watt/sq m) lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes.

C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft (2.7 watt/sq m) H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes.

D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required.

E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.

F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.

1.07 TEMPORARY HEATINGA. Cost of Energy: By Contractor.

B. Provide heating devices and heat as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. Provide source that will not add unnecessary moisture to the interior of the building.

C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.

D. Steam and Condensate:1. The site or building permanent steam and condensate may be used on the project after

permanent connection and meters are installed and the lines are tested, inspected and flushed.

2. The Contractor will be billed for all steam (condensate) used on site unless other arrangements are made at the beginning of the Work by USU Facilities Design and Construction.

E. Natural Gas:1. The Contractor may provide a source of natural gas for the site.2. The site or building permanent natural gas may be used on the project after permanent

connection and meters are installed and the lines are tested and inspected.3. The Contractor will be billed for all natural gas used on site unless other arrangements are

made at the beginning of the Work by USU Facilities Design and Construction.

F. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.

1.08 TEMPORARY COOLINGA. Cost of Energy: By Contractor.

B. Provide cooling devices and cooling as needed to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.

C. Maintain maximum ambient temperature of 80 degrees F (26 degrees C) in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.

D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary cooling purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 5100 - 3

1.09 TEMPORARY VENTILATIONA. Utilize existing ventilation equipment. Extend and supplement equipment with temporary fan

units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations.

1.10 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICEA. Cost of Water Used: By Contractor.

B. Provide and maintain suitable quality water service for construction operations at time of project mobilization.

C. The site or building permanent water may be used on the project after permanent connection and meters are installed and the lines are tested, inspected and flushed. Fire service connections and lines shall not be used for site water.1. The Contractor will be billed for all culinary water used on site unless other arrangements

are made at the beginning of the Work by USU Facilities Design and Construction.

D. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USEDEND OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 5100 - 4

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 1

SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. General product requirements.

B. Re-use of existing products.

C. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.

D. Product option requirements.

E. Substitution limitations.

F. Procedures for Owner-provided products.

G. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.

H. Warranties.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Lists of products to be furnished by Owner and installed by

Contractor.

B. Section 01 2500 - Substitution Procedures: Substitutions made during procurement and/or construction phases.

C. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures and requirements.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Proposed Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Refer to Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures and additional

requirements.

B. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.1. Submit within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 2

2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards.

C. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

D. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

E. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the

manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect or Owner will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTSA. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises unless specifically

required or permitted by Contract Documents.

B. Unforeseen historic items encountered remain the property of the Owner; notify Owner promptly upon discovery; protect, remove, handle, and store as directed by Owner.

C. Existing materials and equipment indicated to be removed, but not to be re-used, relocated, reinstalled, delivered to the Owner, or otherwise indicated as to remain the property of the Owner, become the property of the Contractor; remove from site.

D. Specific Products to be Reused: The reuse of certain materials and equipment already existing on the project site is required.1. See Section 01 1000 for list of items required to be salvaged for reuse and relocation.2. If reuse of other existing materials or equipment is desired, submit substitution request.

2.03 NEW PRODUCTSA. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by Contract Documents.

B. Use of products having any of the following characteristics is not permitted:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 3

1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.2. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.3. Containing lead, cadmium, or asbestos.

C. Where other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that:1. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project.2. Have longer documented life span under normal use.3. Result in less construction waste. See Section 01 74194. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable.5. Are made of recycled materials.6. If made of wood, are made of sustainably harvested wood, wood chips, or wood fiber.

2.04 PRODUCT OPTIONSA. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting

those standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.

D. Products Specified by Basis-of Design: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named if provision for substitutions is included.

E. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other

specified requirements, comply with Substitution Procedures for proposal of product.

F. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALSA. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in

individual specification sections.

B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SUBSTITUTION LIMITATIONS

A. See Section 01 2500 - Substitution Procedures.

3.02 OWNER-PROVIDED PRODUCTSA. See Section 01 1000 for identification of Owner-furnished products.

B. Owner's Responsibilities:1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to

Contractor.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 4

2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient

items.5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections, and service.

C. Contractor's Responsibilities:1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with

Owner.3. Handle, store, install and finish products.4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.

3.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLINGA. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid

loss of factory calibration.

B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of packaging.

C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials.

D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding areas.

F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling.

H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.

3.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTIONA. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to

installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication. See Section 01 7419.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

D. Store sensitive products in weathertight, climate-controlled enclosures in an environment favorable to product.

E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

F. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

G. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather, precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other contaminants.

H. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any.

I. Do not store products directly on the ground.

J. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 5

K. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

L. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.

M. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

N. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

O. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

3.05 PRODUCT WARRANTIESA. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a

particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide

specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a

written document using indicated form properly executed.3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for

submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 6

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

01 7000 - 1

SECTION 01 7000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.

B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances.

C. Pre-installation meetings.

D. Cutting and patching.

E. Cleaning and protection.

F. Starting of systems and equipment.

G. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.

H. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment procedures.

I. General requirements for maintenance service.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on work; occupancy; work sequence; identification of

salvaged and relocated materials.

B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures.

C. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.

D. Section 01 5100 - Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities.

E. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties, and bonds.

F. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sections.

G. Section 02 4100 - Demolition: Selective demolition and removal work.

H. Individual Product Specification Sections:1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections.2. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations;

2019.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities.1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and

construction of barricades and fences. Include design drawings and calculations for bracing and shoring.

2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications.3. Include a summary of safety procedures.

C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

01 7000 - 2

1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.6. Include in request:

a. Identification of Project.b. Location and description of affected work.c. Necessity for cutting or alteration.d. Description of proposed work and products to be used.e. Alternatives to cutting and patching.f. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor.g. Written permission of affected separate Contractor.h. Date and time work will be executed.

D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.

E. List of Incomplete Items (Punch List):1. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by

construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.a. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and

proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.b. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for

ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.2. Submit list of incomplete items in MS Excel electronic file, Architect will return annotated

file.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONSA. For demolition work, employ a firm specializing in the type of work required.

1. Minimum of 5 years of documented experience.

B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in the State of Utah. Employ only individual(s) trained and experienced in establishing and maintaining horizontal and vertical control points necessary for laying out construction work on project of similar size, scope and/or complexity.

C. For design of temporary shoring and bracing, employ a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State of Utah.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Use of explosives is not permitted.

B. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment.

C. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion.

D. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

E. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

01 7000 - 3

1. Site dust control is required per EPA regulations.2. Provide dust-proof barriers between construction areas and areas continuing to be

occupied by Owner.

F. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruptions with USU Facilities Design and Construction. Radios and other devices will not be permitted on-site.

G. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work.1. Pest Control Service: Monthly treatments.

H. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.

1.07 COORDINATIONA. See Section 01 1000 for occupancy-related requirements.

B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.

D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on drawings. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.

H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

2.02 PATCHING MATERIALSA. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching

and extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

01 7000 - 4

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.

D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.

E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.

F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGSA. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site

prior to commencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.

C. Refer to Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for additional meeting requirements.

3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTSA. In addition to compliance with regulatory requirements, conduct construction operations in

compliance with NFPA 241, including applicable recommendations in Appendix A.

B. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.

C. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

G. Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.05 ALTERATIONSA. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and

existing record documents only.1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated.2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

01 7000 - 5

3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Keep areas in which alterations are being conducted separated from other areas that are still occupied.1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in

Section 01 5000 in locations indicated on drawings.

C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace

with new construction specified.2. Remove items indicated on drawings.3. Relocate items indicated on drawings.4. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch,

and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if necessary for successful application of new finish.

5. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.

D. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction.1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to

equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access or provide access panel.

2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as required.

3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize

duration of outages.b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.

4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above

accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction.

E. Protect existing work to remain.1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.

F. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not

possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make recommendation to Architect.

2. Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors, walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.

3. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more occurs in existing work, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review and request instructions.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

01 7000 - 6

G. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the substrate is ready for the new finish.

H. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces

to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.

2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish to match.

I. Clean existing systems and equipment.

J. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do not burn or bury.

K. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.

L. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHINGA. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.

B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.

C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:1. Complete the work.2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.8. Remove and replace defective and non-complying work.

D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

J. Patching:1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous

surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

01 7000 - 7

3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.

3.07 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTSA. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for

Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.08 PROGRESS CLEANINGA. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly

condition.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.

3.09 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORKA. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.

B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.

C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

F. Protect work from spilled liquids. If work is exposed to spilled liquids, immediately remove protective coverings, dry out work, and replace protective coverings.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle coverings if possible.

3.10 SYSTEM STARTUPA. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.

B. Notify Architect and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.

D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

01 7000 - 8

F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONA. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training.

3.12 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Division 23 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.

3.13 FINAL CLEANINGA. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion.

1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy.

B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.

C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.

E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

F. Replace or clean filters of operating equipment.

G. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.

3.14 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTIONA. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage

or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.15 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURESA. Substantial Completion Procedures:

1. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

2. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting pre-substantial completion inspection. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.a. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having

jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

b. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

01 7000 - 9

construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

c. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

d. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.1) Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of

maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.

e. Submit test/adjust/balance records.f. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.3. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10

days prior to requesting pre-substantial completion inspection. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.a. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.b. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise

Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.c. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.d. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completione. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training.

f. Final Meter Readings: Notify Facilities Operations to make final meter readings for USU temporary and permanent utilities. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

g. Utility Billings: Provide proof of clearance from USU Facilities Operations that all utility bills have been paid.

h. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.i. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate

visual defects.

B. Pre-Substantial Completion Inspection: The Architect will schedule a pre-substantial completion inspection. The inspection shall include all Consultants, FD&C, Building Code Official or representative, and USU representatives.1. All inspection reports by University representatives shall be submitted to FD&C who will

provide the Architect with copies of the reports. The Architect shall check for conformance to the Contract Documents.

2. The Architect shall assemble all reports from consultants, and USU representatives and distribute copies to the Contractor and FD&C.

C. Final Completion Procedures:1. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining

final completion, complete the following:a. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01 2000 - Price and

Payment Procedures.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

01 7000 - 10

b. List of Incomplete Items (Punch List): Submit certified list of items to be completed or corrected from pre-substantial completion inspection reports. List shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

D. Substantial Completion Inspection: The substantial completion inspection will be held after completion of the items noted in the pre-substantial completion inspection report and when the building is ready for occupancy. The substantial completion inspection will be made with the State Fire Marshal, State and University Officials, Architect, and Contractor.

3.16 MAINTENANCEA. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.

B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer.

C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and lubricate as required.

D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.

E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of the Owner.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 1

SECTION 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Project Record Documents.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data.

C. Warranties and bonds.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material

payment bonds, warranty, and correction of work.

B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples.

C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.

D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.

E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. USU FD&C Required Submittals:

1. Provide one hard copy of operation and maintenance manuals and warranties on all equipment. Further, provide copies of all manufacturers brochures submitted to the Architect as part of the shop drawing review process. Provide transmittals showing FD&C's acceptance of all material specified. These should be delivered to the Architect for review before receipt of final payment. The Architect shall review these submittals for completeness and incorporate all changes into the Project Record Drawings (As-Builts) to the originals. The Architect shall not receive final payment until all the above items have been received and approved by FD&C.

B. Project Record Documents:1. Before the final payment the Contract shall deliver Project Record Drawings (As-Builts) to

the Architect for review. The Architect will incorporate all corrections on the originals and provide USU with a reproducible record set, the electronic files and PDF electronic files. The original contractor marked up set shall also be delivered to the Owner.

2. Submit one hard copy and four CD-ROM copies.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data:1. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before

commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

2. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments.a. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning

Authority's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

b. Submit one hard copy and four intuitive CD-Rom Instructional Manuals.

D. Warranties and Bonds:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 2

1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.

2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment.

3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.

4. Submit one hard copy and four CD-ROM copies.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:1. Drawings.2. Specifications.3. Addenda.4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.

C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following:1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including:1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,

referenced to permanent surface improvements.3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.4. Field changes of dimension and detail.5. Details not on original Contract drawings.

G. Photo Record of Project: The Contractor shall provide photo documentation of all ductwork and conduits before the installation of the ceiling grid system. Audio narration of the tape shall include the room number, identification of the duct or conduit, and its location in the room. The tape shall be delivered to FD&C after completion of all duct and conduit work.

H. CD-ROM Submittal Requirements:1. All CD-ROM’s shall be authored with Adobe Acrobat. The authoring shall, but not be

limited to include the following:a. All information on the CD-ROM shall be printable on 8.5 x 11 inch or 11 x 17 inch

plain paper.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 3

b. Capture images using OCR technology such that the user can key word search for information.

c. All documentation shall be converted to an unchangeable Portable Document Format (PDF).

3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATAA. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of

Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHESA. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:

1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.

D. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products.

3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMSA. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:

1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and maintenance of the specific products.

C. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed.

D. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.

E. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

F. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

G. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 4

H. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

I. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

J. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

K. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.

L. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed.

M. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.

N. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

O. Include test and balancing reports.

P. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSA. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use,

with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections.

B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for each system.

C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 280 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch (50 mm) maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.

D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.

F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in each volume, with the current volume clearly identified.

G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and major component parts of equipment.

H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper.

I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

J. Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows:1. Project Directory.2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume.3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product category.

a. Source data.b. Product data, shop drawings, and other submittals.c. Operation and maintenance data.d. Field quality control data.e. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 5

4. Design Data: To allow for addition of design data furnished by Architect or others, provide a tab labeled "Design Data" and provide a binder large enough to allow for insertion of at least 20 pages of typed text.

K. Intuitive CD-ROM Instructional Manual:1. An intuitive CD-ROM instructional manual shall be provided to give the owners

representative the information they need to care, adjust, maintain and operate all of the equipment within the building, to include but not limited to, the heating, air conditioning, ventilating, plumbing automatic temperature control systems, kitchen equipment, stage and theatrical equipment, electrical equipment and building products.

2. CD-ROM manual preparation shall be under the direction of an individual or organization that has demonstrated expertise in the preparation of a comprehensive and complete CD-ROM operation and maintenance manual. Qualifications shall be submitted for approval.

3. All CD-ROM’s shall be authored with Adobe Acrobat. The authoring shall, but not be limited to include the following:a. All information on the CD-ROM shall be printable on 8.5 x 11 inch or 11 x 17 inch

plain paper.b. Capture images using OCR technology such that the user can key word search for

information.c. Provide a hypertext alphabetical index of all equipment and building products. All

hypertext shall be the color blue.d. There shall be a button on the top of each page that will return the user back to the

buildings main indexe. All documentation shall be converted to an unchangeable Portable Document Format

(PDF).f. The CD-ROM shall start automatically when inserted in the drive under the current

Windows operating system. By clicking a start button the user will be able to open the electronic manual for the building.

g. Operation and maintenance information to be supplied to the company contracted to do the CD-ROM by the contractors and suppliers providing the materials and equipment.

4. At the beginning or start-up of the CD-ROM there shall be a Main Index screen to direct the user to the portion of the manual desired. This index screens will consist of three (3) major groups. The groups will include:a. Architectural or General Contractors Section

1) Each indexed item from the paper manual will be a hypertext index link to that information on the CD.

b. Mechanical Section1) Each indexed item from the paper manual will be a hypertext index link to that

information on the CD.c. Electrical Section

1) Each indexed item from the paper manual will be a hypertext index link to that information on the CD.

5. The minimum computer requirements to run the CD-ROM will be the following:a. Pentium Processorb. 32 Meg RAMc. 10x CD-ROM drived. Sound Carde. 64 bit 2 meg video cardf. Current Windows operating systemg. SVGA monitor set to 800 x 600 resolution

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 6

6. Four (4) copies of the CD will be provided to the owner’s representative. One source of procurement is:a. Emanuals by Scanitall

1) Address: PO Box 136, Sandy, UT 84091-01362) Website: www.scanitall.com3) Phone: 801-619-2082

3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDSA. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,

and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

C. Co-execute submittals when required.

D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 279 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers.

F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal.

G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item.

H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

I. CD-ROM Submittal Requirements:1. All CD-ROM’s shall be authored with Adobe Acrobat. The authoring shall, but not be

limited to include the following:a. All information on the CD-ROM shall be printable on 8.5 x 11 inch or 11 x 17 inch

plain paper.b. Capture images using OCR technology such that the user can key word search for

information.c. All documentation shall be converted to an unchangeable Portable Document Format

(PDF).END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

01 7900 - 1

SECTION 01 7900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SUMMARY

A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections.

B. Training Session: The Contractor shall provide training to University personnel on all systems listed below. It is the Contractor's responsibility to submit to USU FD&C an attendance log. This attendance log shall include all University personnel present at the training session and their signatures. The Contractor shall provide video recordings of the training session to USU FD&C.

C. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for:1. All software-operated systems.2. HVAC systems and equipment.3. Plumbing equipment.4. Electrical systems and equipment.5. Items specified in individual product Sections.

D. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for:1. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, ceiling finishes.2. Fixtures and fittings.3. Items specified in individual product Sections.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals.

B. Other Specification Sections: Additional requirements for demonstration and training.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Training Plan: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill-level of attendees.1. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner.2. Submit to Commissioning Authority for review and inclusion in overall training plan.3. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training.4. Revise and resubmit until acceptable.5. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions.6. Include at least the following for each training session:

a. Identification, date, time, and duration.b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered.c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications.d. Intended audience, such as job description.e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training.f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc.g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc.h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be

provided by Contractor.

C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per training session.1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

01 7900 - 2

2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not included in O&M manuals.

3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance data.

D. Training Reports: 1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration.2. Sign-in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees.3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references

to supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that could not be answered in original training session.

E. Video Recordings: Submit digital video recording of each demonstration and training session for Owner's subsequent use.1. Format: DVD Disc.2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of

the relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who

actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment.2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary

qualifications.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL

A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner.

B. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.

C. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance.1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other

season within six months.

D. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair procedures.1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.

3.02 TRAINING - GENERALA. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated.

B. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor.

C. Provide training in minimum two hour segments.

D. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show-up" time.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

01 7900 - 3

E. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss:1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup

copies.2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information,

system narratives, and product specific information.3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals.

F. Product- and System-Specific Training:1. Review the applicable O&M manuals.2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and

constraints, and operational strategies.3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down,

seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance.

4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance.5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety

issues and emergency procedures.6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions.7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding

coverage.9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers.10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor.11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.

G. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

01 7900 - 4

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DEMOLITION 02 4100 - 1

SECTION 02 4100 - DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.

B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal.

C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products; temporary bracing and shoring.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities.1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and

construction of barricades and fences.2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:1. Detailed sequence of overall construction schedule, including removal work, with starting

and ending dates for each major activity.2. Interruption of utility services must be communicated to the Owner. Indicate how long

utility services will be interrupted.3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.4. Coordination of Owner's continuing access to the existing building and of how pedestrian

accesses will be secured and/or protected.

D. Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of existing site and adjoining building facades, including finish surface conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition and/or new construction operations. This is at the Contractors discretion if any such conditions are relevant to the project.

E. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and stored for reinstallation.

F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities and subsurface construction.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DEMOLITION 02 4100 - 2

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required.

1. Minimum of five years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 SCOPE

A. Refer to drawings for extent of selective demolition.

3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONSA. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 7000.

B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public.1. Obtain required permits.2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 241.3. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be

removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures.

4. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.5. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or

the public.6. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and

occupants.7. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permit.8. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do

not obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations.

9. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.

C. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.

D. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed.

E. Protect existing structure and elements that are not to be removed.

F. Minimize production of dust due to demolition operations.

G. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's, and mercury.

3.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONSA. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and

existing record documents only.1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated.2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be

apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.

B. Separate areas in which demolition is being conducted from other areas that are still occupied.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DEMOLITION 02 4100 - 3

1. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary dustproof partitions of construction specified in Section 01 5000 in locations indicated on drawings.

2. Provide sound retardant partitions of construction indicated on drawings in locations indicated on drawings.

C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace

with new construction specified.2. Remove items indicated on drawings.

D. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, and Telecommunications): Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated.1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to

equipment and operational components.2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new

services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.

3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal.4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment; remove back to source of

supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification.

E. Protect existing work to remain.1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.4. Patch as specified for patching new work.

3.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVALA. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site. Separate and Recycle Acceptable Materials.

B. Remove from site all materials not to be reused on site; do not burn or bury.

C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.

D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DEMOLITION 02 4100 - 4

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1053 - 1

SECTION 06 1053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Miscellaneous wood framing, blocking, nailers and furring.

B. Fire-retardant treated wood materials.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework.

B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent

deformation and to allow air circulation.

B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, unless otherwise indicated.2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,

American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.

3. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.

2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONSA. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.

B. Moisture Content: Kiln-dry or MC15 (15 percent maximum).

C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers and Furring:1. Lumber: S4S, No. 1 or Construction Grade.2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.3. Panels:

a. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C Plugged or better, Exterior grade.

b. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better.c. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing.

3. Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry or concrete.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1053 - 2

2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENTA. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System

for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating

compliance with specified requirements.

B. Fire Retardant Treatment:1. Manufacturers:

a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc: www.wolmanizedwood.com.b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc: www.frtw.com.c. Osmose, Inc: www.osmose.com.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes.a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for

lumber and 15 percent for plywood.b. All interior rough carpentry items are to be fire retardant treated.c. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated .d. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may

become wet.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERALA. Select material sizes to minimize waste.

B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.

C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.

3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTSA. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,

specialty items, and trim.

B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking.

C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.

D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1053 - 3

E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.

F. Provide the following specific non-structural framing and blocking:1. Cabinets and shelf supports.2. Wall brackets.3. Wall-mounted door stops.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from true position, maximum.

B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet (2 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.

B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

06 1053 - 4

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06 4100 - 1

SECTION 06 4100 - ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Plastic laminate casework. Including the following:

B. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing architectural casework unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

C. Hardware.

D. Preparation for installing utilities.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed

blocking.

B. Section 12 3600 - Countertops.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before

starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that casework can be supported and installed as indicated.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, cabinet hardware, accessories, and finishing materials and processes.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories.1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot (125 mm to 1 m), minimum.2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).

D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches (300 mm) square, illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish.

E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets, demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Millwork and installation shall be in accordance with Custom Grade of the AWI Architectural

woodwork Standards, latest edition. If provisions for the Grade specified are in conflict with, or modified by the drawings and/or specifications, the modifications shall govern.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20

percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06 4100 - 2

1.06 MOCK-UPA. Provide mock-up of typical base cabinet, wall cabinet, and countertop, including hardware and

finishes for each type of cabinet specified.

B. Provide mock-up of each type of checkout counter, display, desk, and table unit, including hardware and finishes.

C. Locate where directed.

D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver materials only when the project is ready for installation and the general contractor has

provided a clean storage area.1. Delivery of architectural millwork shall be made only when the area of operation is

enclosed, all plaster and concrete work is dry and the area broom clean.2. Maintain indoor temperature and humidity within the range recommended by the AWI

Architectural Woodwork Standards for the location of the project.

B. Protect units from moisture damage.

C. Any damage to casework during installation will be properly repaired or replaced.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wood finish carpentry until building is

enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field

measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Artistic Mill: www.artisticmill.com.

B. Fetzer's Architectural Woodwork and Millwork Company: www.fetzerwood.com.

C. Granite Mill, Inc: www.granitemill.com.

D. Huetter Mill and Cabinet: www.huettermill.com.

E. JLR - Fondell Woodwork: www.jlrfondell.com.

F. Montgomery Custom Cabinets: www.montgomercustomcabinets.com.

G. Swainston Mill and Cabinet: www.swainstonmill.com.

H. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORKA. Seismic-Compliant Construction: Comply with all requirements of Seismic Design Category D,

IBC 2018.

B. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI (AWS) for Custom Grade.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06 4100 - 3

C. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets:1. Type of Construction: Frameless.2. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush Overlay.3. Exposed Exterior/Interior Surfaces:

a. Finish Surfaces: HDPL, Type VGS/HGS.b. Core Material: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) or Particleboard.c. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.

4. Semi-Exposed Surfaces:a. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset (Melamine) Panels.b. Drawer Sub-fronts, Backs, and Sides: Baltic Birch Drawer Boxes.c. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset (Melamine) Panels.

5. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

6. Base: Refer to Finish Legend on Drawings.

2.03 WOOD MATERIALSA. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

B. Wood Products: Provide materials in accordance with the AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) Grade specified for the product being fabricated. Moisture Content shall be 6 percent to 12 percent for boards up to 2 inches (50.8 mm) nominal thickness, and shall not exceed 19 percent for thicker pieces.

C. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; Grade 130; composed of wood fibers pressure bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; milled to required shapes; thickness as required.1. Provide products having no added urea-formaldehyde resins.2. Use Water Resistant Medium Density Fiberboard at Wet Locations.

D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2; sanded faces; thickness as required.

E. Thermoset (Melamine) Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with

exposed or semi-exposed edges.2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials:1. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are

indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.a. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of

qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.

2. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.a. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19

and 15 percent, respectively.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06 4100 - 4

2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALSA. Manufacturers:

1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com.2. Panolam Industries International, Inc; Nevamar/Pionite: www.nevamar.com.3. Wilsonart LLC: www.wilsonart.com/#sle.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific applications.

C. Provide specific types as indicated.1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors

and finishes as indicated on Finish Legend.2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors

and finishes as indicated on Finish Legend.3. Post-Formed Horizontal Surfaces: HGP, 0.039 inch (1.0 mm) nominal thickness, through

color, colors and finishes as indicated on Finish Legend.4. ABS/PVC Edgebanding: Through-Color ABS/PVC Edgebanding to match laminate

patterns and colors.a. 0.5 mm thick at Case Bodies.b. 3 mm thick at Doors, Drawer Fronts, False Fronts, and Shelves.c. Manufacturers:

1) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.2) ReHau, Inc: www.rehau.com.3) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI/AWMAC to suit application.

1. Provide products having no added urea-formaldehyde resins.

B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.

D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel finish in exposed locations.

E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

F. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to match adjacent surface.

G. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding.1. Color: Clear.2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent.3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F (-54 to 82 degrees C).4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35.

2.06 HARDWAREA. Hardware: Meeting all BHMA A156.9 Standards and AWI//AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork

Standards for Grades indicated.

B. Pulls: 1-3/4 inch (44.45 mm) Aluminum Linear Flush Pull.1. Finish: Brushed nickel.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06 4100 - 5

2. Acceptable Products:a. Berenson Hardware

1) Model: Bravo.b. Equal as approved by Architect.

C. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.

D. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with shelf hold down clip.

E. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131.

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.1. Standard Duty, Grade 1: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; full-

extension type; epoxy-coated steel with polymer rollers.2. Heavy Duty, Grade 1D-100: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-

bearing slides.3. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24

inches (600 mm) wide.4. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or 24

inches (600 mm) wide.5. Pencil Drawer Slides: Grade 1; for drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and 24

inches (600 mm) wide.6. Keyboard Slides: Grade; for computer keyboard shelves.7. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high

and 16 inches (400 mm) wide.

G. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, BHMA No. 156.9, B01602, steel with satin finish.1. 165 degree at End Cabinets and Stand Alone Cabinets, 110 degrees everywhere else.2. Doors 48 inches and over in height have 3 hinges per door.

H. Aluminum Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063.

I. Locks: 2 keys per lock, master keyed, keyed different, review keying requirements and schedules with Owner prior to installation.1. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.2. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18.1. Finish: As selected by Architect.

K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.07 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Custom Grade.

B. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings.

C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick

or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06 4100 - 6

shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.

Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

F. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet (600 mm) from sink cut-outs.1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.

G. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at 16 inches (400 mm) on center.

H. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, appliances, outlet boxes, and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal cut edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in

installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer.

B. Before installing wood trim, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and back-priming.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements

for grade indicated.

B. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.

C. On walls with resilient furring channels or sound isolation clips (RC or RSIC) use sound isolation backing base to support weight and maintain sound seperation. Refer to Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

D. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.

E. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.

F. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (0.79 mm). Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.

G. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06 4100 - 7

H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or

other variation from a straight line.2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16

inches (400 mm) on center with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, hanging strips or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal framing behind wall finish.

I. Equipment cutouts shown on plans shall be cut by the installer.

J. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND TOUCH UPA. Before completion of the installation, the installer shall adjust all moving and operating parts to

function smoothly and correctly.

B. All nicks, chips, and scratches in the finish shall be filled and retouched. Damaged items that cannot be repaired shall be replaced.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Upon completion of installation, the installer shall clean all installed items of pencil and ink

marks and broom clean the area of operation.

B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

06 4100 - 8

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

FIRESTOPPING 07 8400 - 1

SECTION 07 8400 - FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Firestopping of joints and penetrations in fire resistance rated and smoke resistant assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Cutting and patching.

B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number.

C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used.

G. Installer Qualification: Submit qualification statements for installing mechanics.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings

when tested in accordance with methods indicated.1. Listing in UL (FRD), FM (AG), or ITS (DIR) will be considered as constituting an

acceptable test report.2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at www.icc-

es.org will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report.3. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above

substantiation exists.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:1. Approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation under 1, or meeting any two of the

following requirements:2. Verification of minimum three years documented experience installing work of this type.3. Verification of at least five satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and type.4. Licensed by local authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).

1.05 MOCK-UPA. Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project.

1. Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall constructions, install one assembly for each different combination.

2. Where firestopping is intended to fill a linear opening, install minimum of 1 linear ft (1/3 linear m).

B. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ) before proceeding.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

FIRESTOPPING 07 8400 - 2

C. If accepted, mock-up will represent minimum standard for the Work.

D. If accepted, mock-up may remain as part of the Work. Remove and replace mock-ups not accepted.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions

during and after installation; maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for three days after installation of materials.

B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Firestopping Manufacturers:1. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop/#sle.2. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com/#sle.3. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.4. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com/#sle.5. Specified Technologies Inc: www.stifirestop.com/#sle.6. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Provide products having VOC content lower than

that required by SCAQMD 1168.

B. Mold and Mildew Resistance: Provide firestoppping materials with mold and mildew resistance rating of zero(0) in accordance with ASTM G21.

C. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Provide type of materials as required for tested firestopping assembly.

D. Fire Ratings: Refer to drawings for required systems and ratings.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other materials that could

adversely affect bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond.

C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, completely closing openings.

B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by Owner's Independent Testing Agency.

C. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Install labeling required by code.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

FIRESTOPPING 07 8400 - 3

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Independent Testing Agency: Inspection agency employed and paid by Owner, will examine

penetration firestopping in accordance with ASTM E2174, and ASTM E2393.

B. Repair or replace penetration firestopping and joints at locations where inspection results indicate firestopping or joints do not meet specified requirements.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

FIRESTOPPING 07 8400 - 4

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 1

SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.

B. Fire-rated hollow metal frames for wood doors.1. Fill hollow metal frame with mineral wool batt insulation at sound rated wood door, refer to

Drawings.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors.

B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

C. Section 09 9000 - Paintings and Coatings: Interior doors and frames painting.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct meeting at Project site.

B. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes.

C. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project.

D. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum five years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least five years of documented experience.

C. Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products specified.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified

requirements.

B. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

C. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 2

D. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:1. Ceco Doors, Curries, Flemming Door Products, Assa Abloy Group companies:

www.assaabloydss.com.2. Republic Doors, an Allegion brand: www.republicdoor.com/#sle.3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTSA. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:

1. Steel Sheet: Comply with one or more of the following requirements; galvannealed steel complying with ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled steel complying with ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel complying with ASTM A1011/A1011M, commercial steel (CS) Type B, for each.

2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.3. Door Edge Profile: Manufacturers standard for application indicated.4. Typical Door Face Sheets: Flush. 5. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and

NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements.

6. Zinc Coating for Typical Interior and/or Exterior Locations: Provide metal components zinc-coated (galvanized) and/or zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip process in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness, unless noted otherwise for specific hollow metal doors and frames.a. Based on SDI Standards: Provide at least A40/ZF120 (galvannealed) when

necessary, coating not required for typical interior door applications, and at least A60/ZF180 (galvannealed) for corrosive locations.

B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORSA. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished.

B. Interior Doors, Non-Fire Rated:1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).

a. Level 2 - Heavy-duty.b. Physical Performance Level B, 500,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.c. Model 1 - Full Flush.d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 18 gage, 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), minimum.

2. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inch (44.5 mm), nominal.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 3

2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMESA. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in

accordance with applicable door frame requirements.

B. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.

C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.1. Terminated Stops: Provide at interior doors; closed end stop terminated 6 inch (150 mm),

maximum, above floor at 45 degree angle.2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), minimum.

D. Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.2. Terminated Stops: Provide at interior doors; closed end stop terminated 6 inch (150 mm),

maximum, above floor at 45 degree angle.3. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage, 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), minimum.

E. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with corresponding door.

2.05 FINISHESA. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.

B. Coordinate with Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coatings for interior paint finish.

C. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.

2.06 ACCESSORIESA. Mechanical Fasteners for Concealed Metal-to-Metal Connections: Self-drilling, self-tapping,

steel with electroplated zinc finish.

B. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; provide three on strike side of single door, three on center mullion of pairs, and two on head of pairs without center mullions.

C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.

D. Jamb Anchors:1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042

inch (1.0 mm) thick.

E. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows:1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

F. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of hollow metal frames.1. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component.

a. Color: As selected by Architect.b. Backer rods as required.c. Manufacturers:

1) Sherwin-Williams Company; Stampede-1/-TX Polyurethane Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

2) Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-15 LM: www.usa-sika.com/#sle.3) Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Vulkem 116:

www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.4) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

08 1113 - 4

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior

to installation.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related

requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.

B. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.

C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.

D. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7100.

E. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified frame

standards or custom guidelines indicated in accordance with SDI 117 or NAAMM HMMA 861.

B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Test sound control doors for force to close, latch, and unlatch; adjust as necessary in compliance with requirements.

3.06 SCHEDULEA. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 1

SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Pre-fitted flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated, non-rated, and acoustical.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

B. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefront and Entrances: Door frames.

C. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene at project site seven calendar days prior to scheduled

beginning of construction activities of this section to review section requirements.

B. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the assembly.

C. Contractor/Installer to verify finish and dimensions prior to ordering doors.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics.

C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing and other details.1. Provide information as required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).

D. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples of door veneer, 6 by 6 inch (150 by 150 mm) in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen.1. Architect to approve samples before fabrication.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.

F. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in

this section with minimum five years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.

B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach finish. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and

weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 2

maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.

C. Include coverage for warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. All finishes used on the project are to match the existing finishes installed. Finish information provided is based on record drawings and or previous project submittals and requires verification by the General Contractor in the field.

B. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:1. Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com/#sle.2. Graham Wood Doors: www.grahamdoors.com/#sle.3. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com/#sle.4. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com/#sle.5. VT Industries, Inc: www.vtindustries.com/#sle.6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Sound-Rated Wood Doors:1. VT Industries, Inc: www.vtindustries.com/#sle.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DOORS A. Doors: Refer to drawings for locations and additional requirements.

1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Extra Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS).

2. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.3. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde.

B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.1. Provide solid core doors at each location.2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with UL 10C -

Positive Pressure; Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL) or Intertek/Warnock Hersey (WHI) labeled without any visible seals when door is open.

3. Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): In addition to required fire rating, provide door assemblies tested in accordance with UL 1784 with maximum air leakage of 3.0 cfm per sq ft (0.01524 cu m/s/sq m) of door opening at 0.10 inch wg (24.9 Pa) pressure at both ambient and elevated temperatures for "S" label; if necessary, provide additional gasketing or edge sealing.

4. Sound Retardant Doors: Minimum STC of 39, calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, tested in accordance with ASTM E90.

5. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish.

2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORESA. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and

faces as indicated.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 3

B. Fire-Rated Doors: Mineral core type, with fire resistant composite core (FD), plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting.

C. Sound-Rated Doors: Equivalent to type, with particleboard core (PC) construction as required to achieve STC rating specified; plies and faces as indicated above.

2.04 DOOR FACINGSA. Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Select White Birch, match existing doors.

1. Door Type B: Select White Maple, plain sliced (flat cut), with book match between leaves of veneer, running match of spiced veneer leaves assembled on door.

2. Door Type D: Oak to match existing doors.

B. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof; not containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.

2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTIONA. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.

B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails: 1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement.2. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware.

C. Where supplementary protective edge trim is required, install trim after veneer facing has been applied full-width.

D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions.

E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.

F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.

2.06 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORSA. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 -

Finishing for grade specified and as follows:1. Transparent:

a. System - 11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed.b. Stain: As selected by Architect.c. Sheen: As selected by Architect.d. Architect to approve sample before fabrication.

B. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.

2.07 ACCESSORIESA. Hollow Metal Door Frames: As specified in Section 08 1113.

B. Aluminum Door Frame Assemblies: As specified in Section 08 4313.

C. Sound Gasketing System:1. Double row Pemko S-88 adhesive gasketing2. Zero 369 automatic door bottom3. Required Undercut - 5/8 inch

D. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 7100.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 4

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.

1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.2. Install smoke and draft control doors in accordance with NFPA 105 requirements.

B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.

C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.

D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.

E. Coordinate installation of sound gasketing.

3.03 TOLERANCESA. Comply with specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.

B. Comply with specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.

3.04 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Adjust closers for full closure.

3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGSEND OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS AND

ENTRANCES

08 4313 - 1

SECTION 08 4313 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Interior storefront framing.

B. Interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Wood doors.

B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware and Schedule: Door hardware not specified in this section.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene at project site seven calendar days prior to scheduled

beginning of construction activities of this section to review section requirements.1. Require attendance by representatives of installer and other entities directly affecting, or

affected by, construction activities of this section.

B. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the assembly.

C. Contractor/Installer to verify finish.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: For each type of product.1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction.2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-

framed storefronts, showing the following:a. Joinery, including concealed welds.b. Anchorage.c. Expansion provisions.d. Glazing.

D. Samples for Verification: Submit two samples each 6 x 6 inches (150 x 1505 mm) in size illustrating finished aluminum surface..

E. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

G. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed storefronts to include in maintenance manuals.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: An installer which has had successful experience with installation of the

same or similar units required for the project and other projects of similar size and scope with minimum of five years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS AND

ENTRANCES

08 4313 - 2

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with

Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

C. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of aluminum-framed storefront openings by field

measurements before fabrication and indicate field measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (5 degrees C). Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.08 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting

structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS AND

ENTRANCES

08 4313 - 3

b. Glass breakage.c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.e. Failure of operating units.

B. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.1. Seismic Drift Causing Glass Fallout: Complying with criteria for passing based on building

occupancy type when tested according to AAMA 501.6 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.

C. Noise Reduction: Test according to AAMA Specification 1801 and in accordance with ASTM E1425 and ASTM E90, the STC Rating shall not be less than:1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 36.

2.02 MANUFACTURERSA. All finishes used on the project are to match the existing finishes installed. Finish information

provided is based on record drawings and or previous project submittals and requires verification by the General Contractor in the field.

B. Aluminum Storefront: Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com.1. Interior Storefront System: Trifab VG 451; Framing System.2. Doors: 190 Narrow Stile Standard Entrance.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 STOREFRONT FRAMING SYSTEMA. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with

nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. Where exposed shall be stainless steel.

C. Perimeter Anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum material to prevent galvanic action.

D. Interior Storefront System:1. Glazing Position: Front glazed.2. Glazing Stops: Flush. Type for 1/2 inch (13 mm) monolithic glazing.3. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: As indicated on Drawings.4. Finish: Clear Anodized.

2.04 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMSA. Major portions of the door members to be 0.125 inch (3.2) nominal in thickness and glazing

molding to be 0.05 inch (1.3) thick.

B. Glazing gaskets shall be either EPDM elastomeric extrusions or a thermoplastic elastomer.

C. Provide adjustable glass jacks to help center the glass in the door opening.

D. Interior Glazed Aluminum Door:1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).2. Top Rail: 2-1/4 inches (57.2 mm) wide.3. Vertical Stiles: 2-1/8 inches (54 mm) wide.4. Bottom Rail: 3-7/8 inches (98.4 mm) high.5. Glazing Stops: Square.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS AND

ENTRANCES

08 4313 - 4

6. Finish: Clear Anodized.

2.05 MATERIALSA. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum storefront manufacturer for

strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish and not less than 0.070 inch (1.8 mm) wall thickness at any location for the main frame and complying with ASTM B 221: 6063-T6 alloy and temper.

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel or other materials to be non-corrosive and compatible with aluminum framing members, trim hardware, anchors, and other components.

C. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

D. Reinforcing Members: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or nickel/chrome-plated steel complying with ASTM B 456 for Type SC 3 severe service conditions, or zinc-coated steel or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions or other suitable zinc coating; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.

E. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated storefront system, provide permanently elastic, non-shrinking, and non-migrating type recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint size and movement.

F. Tolerances: Reference to tolerances for wall thickness and other cross-sectional dimensions of storefront members are nominal and in compliance with AA Aluminum Standards and Data

2.06 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWAREA. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 08

7100 - Door Hardware.

B. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum-framed entrance doors.

C. Sill Sweep Strips: EPDM blade gasket sweep strip in an aluminum extrusion applied to the interior exposed surface of the bottom rail with concealed fasteners (Necessary to meet specified performance tests).

2.07 GLAZINGA. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 8000 - Glazing.

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

2.08 ACCESSORIESA. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems.

1. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component.a. Color: As selected by Architect.b. Backer rods as required.c. Manufacturers:

1) Sherwin-Williams Company; Stampede-1/-TX Polyurethane Sealant: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.

2) Sika Corporation; Sikaflex-15 LM: www.usa-sika.com/#sle.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS AND

ENTRANCES

08 4313 - 5

3) Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Vulkem 116: www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.

4) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30 mil (0.762 mm) thickness per coat.

2.09 FABRICATIONA. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following

characteristics:1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.2. Accurately fit joints; make joints flush, hairline and weatherproof.3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances.5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing.6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

B. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

C. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufacturer’s standard installation instructions.

D. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings

E. Entrance Doors:1. Fabricate aluminum-framed entrance doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system

for assembling components and anchoring doors.2. Fabricate aluminum-framed glass doors that are reglazable without dismantling perimeter

framing.a. Door corner construction shall consist of mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep

penetration plug welds and 1-1/8" (29 mm) long fillet welds inside and outside of all four corners. Glazing stops shall be hook-in type with EPDM glazing gaskets reinforced with non-stretchable cord.

b. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints hairline in appearance.c. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware.d. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.

2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHESA. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating or AAMA

612 clear anodic coating with electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick.

B. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions and operational clearances.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS AND

ENTRANCES

08 4313 - 6

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing

aluminum-framed storefront system, accessories, and other components.

B. Install aluminum-framed storefront system level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to adjacent construction.

C. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCESA. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the

following maximum tolerances:1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m).2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in 12.2 m).3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length.

3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Adjust hardware, and accessories for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for

smooth operation and weather tight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.

B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing aluminum-framed storefronts. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

C. Clean glass immediately after installation. Comply with glass manufacturer's written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove non-permanent labels, and clean surfaces.

D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

08 7100 - 1

SECTION 08 7100 - DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:1. Swinging doors.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:1. Mechanical door hardware.2. Electromechanical door hardware.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

B. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors.

C. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefont and Entrances.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having

Jurisdiction.1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

B. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series2. UL10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and

Format for the Hardware Schedule."2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating

complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.b. Manufacturer of each item.c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

08 7100 - 2

d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule.

e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.f. Mounting locations for door hardware.g. Door and frame sizes and materials.h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring

diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and

interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings.

b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams.c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.

2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.

D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

E. Informational Submittals:1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on

evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Procedures.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of

documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

08 7100 - 3

of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line

by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical

door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

F. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.3. Requirements for key control storage and software.4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

G. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct

the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.

2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening.4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures

H. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware

delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.07 COORDINATIONA. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other

work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

08 7100 - 4

Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.

C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

1.08 WARRANTYA. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified

in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.2. Faulty operation of the hardware.3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods:1. Seven years for heavy duty cylindrical (bored) locks and latches.2. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies.

1.09 MAINTENANCE SERVICEA. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and

maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for

each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

08 7100 - 5

2.02 HANGING DEVICESA. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other

options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity:

a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every

30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for

door thickness and clearances required:a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified.b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing

hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges

unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following:

a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.

5. Manufacturers:a. McKinney Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (MK) - TA Series.

2.03 DOOR OPERATING TRIMA. Flush Bolts and Surface Bolts: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 and A156.16, Grade 1, certified.

1. Flush bolts to be furnished with top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt retraction device location approximately six feet from the floor.

2. Furnish dust proof strikes for bottom bolts.3. Surface bolts to be minimum 8” in length and U.L. listed for labeled fire doors and U.L.

listed for windstorm components where applicable.4. Provide related accessories (mounting brackets, strikes, coordinators, etc.) as required for

appropriate installation and operation.5. Manufacturers:

a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).b. Trimco (TC).

B. Coordinators: ANSI/BHMA A156.3 certified door coordinators consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf release trigger. Model as indicated in hardware sets.1. Manufacturers:

a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).b. Trimco (TC).

2.04 CYLINDERS AND KEYINGA. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured

master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

08 7100 - 6

1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application.2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised

trim ring.3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be

flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard.

D. High Security Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 High security cylinder conforming to UL437, including both pick and drill resistance. Pick resistance incorporates two or more independent locking mechanisms including a pin tumbler device with six top pin chambers, mushroom-shaped driver pins, and coded sidebar locking mechanism operated independently from the six top pin tumbler device. Drill resistance incorporates cylinder housing with fixed case-hardened inserts protecting the pin tumbler shear line, cylinder plugs with case-hardened inserts protecting both the pin tumbler shear line and the side bar, mushroom-shaped stainless steel driver pins, and stainless steel sidepins. Cylinders to be factory keyed.1. Manufacturers:

a. ASSA (AA) - Owner Furnished and Installed.

E. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.

F. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2)2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5).

2.05 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICESA. Cylindrical Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1

certified.1. Furnish with solid cast levers, standard 2 3/4” backset, and 1/2" (3/4" at rated paired

openings) throw brass or stainless steel latchbolt.2. Locks are to be non-handed and fully field reversible.3. Manufacturers:

a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 10 Line.b. Schlage (SC) - ND Series.

2.06 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKESA. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with

curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by

manufacturer.2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for

aluminum framing.4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for

rescue hardware applications.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13.2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36.4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

08 7100 - 7

2.07 DOOR CLOSERSA. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.

4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets.

B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard.1. Manufacturers:

a. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040 Series.b. Norton Door Controls (NO) - 7500 Series.

2.08 SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSER HOLDERSA. Electromagnetic Door Holders: Certified ANSI A156.15 electromagnetic door holder/releases

with a minimum 20 to 40 pounds holding power and single coil construction able to accommodate.12VDC, 24VAC, 24VDC and 120VAC. Coils to be independently wound, employing an integral fuse and armatures to include a positive release button.1. Manufacturers:

a. LCN Door Closers (LC) - SEM7800 Series.b. Rixson (RF) - 980/990 Series.

2.09 ARCHITECTURAL TRIMA. Door Protective Trim

1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

08 7100 - 8

3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications.

4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.

5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.

6. Manufacturers:a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).b. Trimco (TC).

2.10 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERSA. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the

Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.1. Manufacturers:

a. Rockwood Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (RO).b. Trimco (TC).

C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function.1. Manufacturers:

a. Glynn Johnson (GJ).b. Rixson Door Controls (RF).

2.11 ARCHITECTURAL SEALSA. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified

below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.

C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure

Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

08 7100 - 9

E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

F. Manufacturers:1. Pemko Products; ASSA ABLOY Architectural Door Accessories (PE).2. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).

2.12 FABRICATIONA. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally

prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

2.13 FINISHESA. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes

complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment

to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and

adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural

Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors."3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1

"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is

located.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

08 7100 - 10

C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Field Inspection (Punch-Out Report): Reference Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures".

Final inspect installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from specification requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

3.05 ADJUSTINGA. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to

ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed

hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.07 DEMONSTRATIONA. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and

electromechanical door hardware.

3.08 DOOR HARDWARE SETSA. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They

are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.

B. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products and providing the correct option for the appropriate door type and material where more than one is presented in the hardware sets. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door.

C. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:1. OT - Other2. MK - McKinney3. SA - SARGENT

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

08 7100 - 11

4. SU - Securitron5. AA - ASSA High Security Locks6. RO - Rockwood7. RF - Rixson8. NO - Norton9. PE - Pemko

3.09 HARDWARE SETS

Set: 1.0Doors: 101 3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK1 Magnetic Lock M380BD 628 SU ⚡2 Door Pull (BTB) RM3311-12 Mtg-Type 16 US32D RO1 Surface Closer CPS7500 689 NO1 Drop Plate 7788 (as required) 689 NO1 Perimeter Seals Frame manufacturer's standard OT1 Push to Exit Button EEB2 SU ⚡1 Motion Sensor XMS SU ⚡1 Power Supply AQD Series (as required) SU ⚡1 Card Reader Provided by access control OT ⚡ Notes: Door normally closed and locked electromagnetically.Entry by valid credential releasing the electromagnetic locks.Free egress at all times by motion sensor or push button. Set: 2.0Doors: 106 3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK1 Storeroom Lock LC 28 10G04 LL US26D SA1 Cylinder (KIL) *65673 626 AA1 Surface Closer 7500 689 NO1 Door Stop 406/409 (type as required) US32D RO3 Silencer 608-RKW RO Set: 3.0Doors: 108 3 Hinge Per STC manufacturer 626 OT1 Office Lock LC 28 10G05 LL US26D SA1 Surface Closer 7500 689 NO1 Kick Plate K1050 10" CSK BEV US32D RO1 Electromagnetic Holder 99XM 689 RF ⚡1 Gasketing Per STC Manufacturer OT1 Door Bottom Per STC Manufacturer OT Notes: Connect holder to release upon signal from the fire alarm.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOOR HARDWARE AND SCHEDULE

08 7100 - 12

Set: 4.0Doors: 102, 103, 105, 107 3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK1 Office Lock LC 28 10G05 LL US26D SA1 Cylinder (KIL) *65673 626 AA1 Door Stop 406/409 (type as required) US32D RO1 Gasketing S44BL PE1 Door Bottom STC411APK PE Set: 5.0Doors: 104 3 Hinge, Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK1 Office Lock LC 28 10G05 LL US26D SA1 Cylinder (KIL) *65673 626 AA1 Surface Overhead Stop 10-X36 630 RF1 Gasketing S44BL PE1 Door Bottom STC411APK PE

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GLAZING 08 8000 - 1

SECTION 08 8000 - GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Glazing units.

B. Glazing compounds and accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts and Entrances: Glazing furnished as part of

storefront assembly.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of

this section; require attendance by each of the affected installers.1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's

personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.

B. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data on each Glazing Type: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling and installation requirements.

C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify available colors.

D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch (300 by 300 mm) in size of glass units.

E. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM) and GANA (SM) for glazing installation methods.

Maintain one copy on site.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least five years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to

glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C).

B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GLAZING 08 8000 - 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Float Glass Manufacturers:1. AGC Glass North America, Inc: www.agcglass.com/#sle.2. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com/#sle.3. Guardian Glass, LLC: www.guardianglass.com/#sle.4. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na/#sle.5. Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG Glass): www.vitroglazings.com/#sle.6. Viracon, Architectural Glass segment of Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com.7. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 GLASS MATERIALSA. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless otherwise indicated.

1. Kind FT - Fully Tempered Type: Complies with ASTM C1048.2. Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR 1201 criteria for

safety glazing used in hazardous locations.

2.03 GLAZING UNITSA. Monolithic Interior Vision Glazing:

1. Applications: Interior glazing unless otherwise indicated.2. Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass, low iron.3. Tint: Clear.4. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm), nominal.

2.04 ACCESSORIESA. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing

standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm) x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

D. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.

E. Glazing Tape, Back Bedding Mastic Type: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids compound with integral resilient spacer rod applicable to application indicated; 5 to 30 cured Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.1. Width: As required for application.2. Thickness: As required for application.3. Spacer Rod Diameter: As required for application.

F. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option I; color black.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GLAZING 08 8000 - 3

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

B. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being provided.

C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing system.

D. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively.

E. Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hours

before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates.

B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.

C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERALA. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing

material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in glazing referenced standards.

B. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass manufacturer.

C. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

D. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated.

E. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing, plastering, mortar droppings, etc.

3.04 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)A. Application - Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the interior of the building.

B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch (152 mm) from corners.

C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact.

D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact.

3.05 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)A. Application - Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the interior of the building.

B. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line.

C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inch (152 mm) from corners.

D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GLAZING 08 8000 - 4

E. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.

F. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact.

G. Carefully trim protruding tape with knife.

3.06 CLEANINGA. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using

solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.

B. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete.

C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured.

D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.07 PROTECTIONA. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.

B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial Completion.

3.08 SCHEDULES - REFER TO OPENING SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGSEND OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 1

SECTION 09 2116 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.1. Interior partition assemblies.2. Fire-rated assemblies.

B. Metal framing.

C. Acoustical sealant.

D. Sound attenuation batts.

E. Gypsum wallboard.

F. Joint treatment and accessories.

G. Patch, repair, and prepare existing walls and ceilings for refinishing where indicated on Drawings.

H. Provide a smooth transition between new and existing walls with no visible seams or joints.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution

requirements.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with acoustic seals.

C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing system.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on partition head to structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements.

E. Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or ASTM C754, provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and

finishing, with minimum five years of documented experience.

1.05 MOCKUPSA. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.1. Build mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on

exposed surfaces for review of mockups.3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 2

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLINGA. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy

surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.

B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Sound-Rated: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 54 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on

tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.

C. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies as indicated on Drawings.1. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular

assembly in the current UL (FRD).

D. Marking and Identification: Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers, and smoke partitions or any other wall required to have protective openings or penetrations shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling. Such identification shall:1. Be located in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic spaces.2. Be located within 15 feet (4572 mm) of the end of each wall and at intervals not exceeding

30 feet (9144 mm) measured horizontally along the wall or partition; and3. Include lettering not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in height with a minimum 3/8 inch (9.5

mm) stroke in a contrasting color incorporating the suggested wording. " FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS" or other wording.

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALSA. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:

1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC: www.clarkdietrich.com.2. Jaimes Industries: www.jaimesind.com/#sle.3. Marino: www.marinoware.com.4. Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phillipsmfg.com/#sle.5. SCAFCO Corporation: www.scafco.com/#sle.6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; C-channel, roll-formed from hot-dipped galvanized sheet steel, complying with ASTM A 1003 and ASTM A 653 G40 or equivalent corrosion resistant coating (A40 galvannealed products are unacceptable per ASTM C 645), with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf (L/240 at 240 Pa).

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 3

1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.a. 20 gage, 0.032 inch (0.08 mm) minimum, unless noted otherwise.

2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.a. 20 gage, 0.032 inch (0.08 mm) minimum, unless noted otherwise.

3. Angles: 20 gage, 0.032 inch (0.08 mm) minimum, size as shown on Drawings.4. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped, 20 gage, 0.032 inch (0.08 mm) minimum.5. Furring:

a. Hat-shaped sections, 20 gage, 0.032 inch (0.08 mm), size as shown on Drawings.b. Z-shaped sections, 20 gage, 0.032 inch (0.08 mm), size as shown on Drawings.

6. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated:a. Galvanized sheet steel.

C. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws, and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition.1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity

required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12.2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot-dipped

galvanized coating.3. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems

of fire rating and movement required.4. Provide mechanical anchorage devices as described above that accommodate deflection

while maintaining the fire-resistance rating of the wall assembly.5. Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing

indicated on drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet (3660 mm).

D. Non-structural Framing Accessories:1. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.

2.03 BOARD MATERIALSA. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:

1. American Gypsum Company: www.americangypsum.com.2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com.4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.2. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Resistance Rating: Use type required by indicated

tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.3. Thickness:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch (16 mm) Type X, refer to drawings for other thicknesses required.

b. Multi-Layer Assemblies: Thicknesses as indicated on drawings.4. Paper-Faced Products:

a. American Gypsum Company; FireBloc Type X Gypsum Wallboard.b. CertainTeed Corporation; Type X Drywall.c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Fireguard X.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 4

d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Type X Fire-Shield Gypsum Board.e. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Type X Gypsum Board.f. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.04 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIESA. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.2. Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville; MinWool Sound Attenuation Fire Batts: www.jm.com/#sle.b. ROCKWOOL (ROXUL, Inc); AFB: www.rockwool.com/#sle.c. Thermafiber, Inc; SAFB: www.thermafiber.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Acoustical Sealant - Acrylic Emulsion Latex: Water-based; ASTM C834, single component, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging, paintable.1. Effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in

building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90.

2. Manufacturers:a. Hilti, Inc; CP 506 Smoke and Acoustical Sealant: www.us.hilti.com/#sle.b. Liquid Nails, a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings; AS-825 Acoustical Sound

Sealant: www.liquidnails.com/#sle.c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 +Silicone or AIS-919: www.pecora.com/#sle.d. Sherwin-Williams Company; 950A Siliconized Acrylic Latex Caulk: www.sherwin-

williams.com/#sle.e. Specified Technologies Inc; Smoke N' Sound Acoustical Sealant:

www.stifirestop.com/#sle.f. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing; Tremstop Smoke and Sound:

www.tremcosealants.com/#sle.g. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.1. Types: As detailed on Drawings or required for finished appearance.2. Manufacturers:

a. Same manufacturer as framing materials.b. Phillips Manufacturing Co: www.phillipsmfg.com.c. USG: www.usg.com.d. Fry Reglet Corporation: www.fryreglet.come. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

D. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions.1. Paper Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners.2. Joint Compound: Drying type, vinyl-based, ready-mixed or field-mixed.3. Joint Compound: Setting type, field-mixed.

E. Finishing Compound: Surface coat and primer, takes the place of skim coating.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 5

F. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion-resistant.

G. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.

H. Adhesive for Attachment to Concrete:1. Products:

a. Franklin International, Inc; Titebond PROvantage Professional Drywall Adhesive: www.titebond.com/#sle.

b. Liquid Nails, a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings; LN-2000 FUZE*IT All Surface Construction Adhesive: www.liquidnails.com/#sle.

c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.

3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATIONA. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.1. Level ceiling and soffit system to a tolerance of 1/1200.

C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center (at 406 mm on center).1. Extend partition framing to structure in all locations.2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance

between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud connections; do not leave studs unattached to track.

D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than double studs at jambs.

3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATIONA. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around

electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.

B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing

members.2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.3. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where

firestopping is provided.

3.04 BOARD INSTALLATIONA. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end

joints, especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Nonrated: Install gypsum board perpendicular to framing, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.

C. Double-Layer, Nonrated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Place second layer perpendicular to framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 6

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing.

E. Installation on Metal Framing: Use screws for attachment of gypsum board.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIESA. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.

1. Not more than 30 feet (10 meters) apart on walls over 50 feet (16 meters) long.

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.

C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.

3.06 JOINT TREATMENTA. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, embed with setting type joint compound

and finish with drying type joint compound.

B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise

indicated.2. Level 1: Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed

construction.

C. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes.1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).2. Taping, filling, and sanding are not required at base layer of double-layer applications.

3.07 TOLERANCESA. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet

(3 mm in 3 m) in any direction.

3.08 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy

surface contamination and discoloration.END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION

USU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 1

SECTION 09 6500 - RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Resilient base.

B. Installation accessories.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.

C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection.

D. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer that condition of subfloor is acceptable.

E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Wall Base: 10 linear feet (3 linear meters) of each type and color.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring with

minimum five years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring with minimum five years documented experience.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and the

correct style, color, quantity and run numbers.

B. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized, weather-tight space.

C. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (72 degrees C).

D. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.

E. Do not double stack pallets.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a

temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F (13 degrees C).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base: 1, Type TP, rubber, thermoplastic; top set, toe base. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Roppe Corp; 700 Series: www.roppe.com.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION

USU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

RESILIENT FLOORING 09 6500 - 2

b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 648. 3. Height: 4 inch (100 mm). 4. Finish: Satin. 5. Length: Roll. 6. Color: 100 Black. 7. Accessories: Premolded external corners, internal corners, and end stops.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate.

B. Apply primer as required to prevent "bleed-through" or interference with adhesion by substances that cannot be removed.

3.03 INSTALLATION - RESILIENT BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches (45 mm) between

joints.

B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units.

C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION

USU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

TILE CARPETING 09 6813 - 1

SECTION 09 6813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Carpet tile, fully adhered.

B. Transition strip trim.

1.02 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review wall and subfloor preparation procedures.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data on new specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics and method of installation.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints, direction of carpet pile, and location of edge moldings.

D. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long

Samples.

E. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that

are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. a. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type

indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with

minimum five years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet tile with minimum five years documented experience.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION

USU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

TILE CARPETING 09 6813 - 2

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation

limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.

1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of

carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,

failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Dimensional instability. c. Excess static discharge. d. Loss of tuft-bind strength. e. Loss of face fiber. f. Delamination.

3. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Interface, Inc: www.interface.com/#sle.

2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 CARPET TILE A. Collection: Cartera.

B. Style: Lima - 145900250H.

C. Color: 101348 - Adobe.

D. Tile Size: 50 cm by 50 cm.

E. Install Method: Brick.

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based

formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

C. Transition Strips: Vinyl transition strips. 1. Profile to accommodate carpet tile to concrete. 2. Profile to accommodate carpet tile to VCT tile.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION

USU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

TILE CARPETING 09 6813 - 3

3. Color as selected by Architect. 4. Manufacturers:

a. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subfloor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet tile.

B. Verify that subfloor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive materials to subfloor surfaces.

C. Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for flooring installation by testing for moisture and alkalinity (pH). 1. Test as Follows:

a. Alkalinity (pH): ASTM F710. b. Internal Relative Humidity: ASTM F2170. c. Moisture Vapor Emission: ASTM F1869.

2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.

B. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler.

C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

D. Vacuum clean substrate.

3.03 INSTALLATION A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of subfloor conditions.

B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104 (Commercial).

C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.

D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.

E. Lay carpet tile in brick pattern, with pile direction parallel to next unit, set aligned as indicated on shop drawings.

F. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.

G. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate.

H. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.

I. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION

USU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

TILE CARPETING 09 6813 - 4

3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 1

SECTION 09 9000 - PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance of painting, including cleaning, small crack repair, patching, and caulking.

B. Refinish existing walls as indicated on Drawings. Paint the entire wall surface to match existing.

C. Field application of paints and coatings.

D. Scope: Finish all interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished or to remain natural; the term "exposed" includes areas visible through permanent and built-in fixtures when they are in place. Finish all surfaces described in PART 2, indicated on Drawings and as follows:1. If a surface, material, or item is not specifically mentioned, paint in the same manner as

similar surfaces, materials, or items, regardless of whether colors are indicated or not.2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furnishings the same as similar exposed

surfaces.3. Finish surfaces to be concealed behind permanently installed fixtures, equipment, and

furnishings, using primer only, prior to installation of the permanent item.4. Finish semi-exposed structure, miscellaneous pipes, conduit, ducts, etc. visible through

finished ceiling elements.5. Finish back sides of access panels and removable and hinged covers to match exposed

surfaces.6. Mechanical and Electrical:

a. In all areas, finish all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in utility areas in colors according to the color coding scheme indicated.

c. Refer to Divisions 22, 23, and 26 for schedule of color coding of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit.

d. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and finish separately.

e. In all areas, finish shop-primed items.f. Finish interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with

one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.g. Finish dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, to match face panels.h. Diffusers and grilles to match color of walls and ceilings, as directed by Architect.

7. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:a. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products

having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.b. Items indicated to receive other finishes.c. Items indicated to remain unfinished.d. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts

of equipment.e. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items.f. Glass.g. Acoustical materials, unless specifically so indicated.h. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 2

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Division 22 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Color coding scheme for items

to be painted under this section.

B. Division 23 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Color coding scheme for items to be painted under this section.

C. Division 26 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Color coding scheme for items to be painted under this section.

1.03 DEFINITIONSA. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data sheets on all finishing products, including: VOC content.1. Product characteristics.2. Surface preparation instructions and recommendations.3. Primer requirements and finish specification.4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.5. Application methods.6. Cautions.

C. Selection Samples: Submit a complete set of color chips that represent the full range (including premium) of manufacturer's color samples available.1. Allow 30 days for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect.2. Paint color submittals will not be considered until color submittals for major materials not

to be painted, such as masonry, factory finished metals, wood doors, and casework, have been approved.

3. Within a reasonable amount of time after all color related submittals have been reviewed and accepted, the Architect will issue the "Color Schedule" for the project which will include all required paint color selections for the Contractors use.

D. Verification Samples: Submit two paper "drop" samples, 2 by 3 inches (50 by 75 mm) in size, illustrating selected color and sheen for each finishing product specified.

E. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.

F. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings do not contain any of the prohibited chemicals specified; GreenSeal GS-11 certification is not required but if provided shall constitute acceptable certification.

G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and substrate conditions requiring special attention.

H. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.

I. At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color coding for all colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance.

J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.2. Extra Paint and Coatings: 1 gallon (4 L) of each color; store where directed.3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 3

K. Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area summary with finish schedule, area detail designating location where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, material safety data sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. This Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years proven satisfactory experience and shall

show show proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters throughout the duration of the work. Contractor shall provide a list of the last three comparable jobs including, name and location, project manager, start/completion dates and value of painting work.

B. Material Safety Data Sheets: At project site maintain file of MSDS sheets for each product used; become familiar with and follow manufacturer's stated application and safety requirements.

C. All surfaces requiring painting/coating shall be inspected by the Painting/Coating Manufacturer's Product Representative who shall notify the Architect and General Contractor in writing of any defects or problems, prior to commencing painting work, or after the prime coat shows defects in the substrate. The Manufacturer's Product Representative shall provide a written certification of all surfaces and conditions for paint or coating system application as well as on site supervision, inspection and approval of the application.

D. The painting contractor shall receive written confirmation of the specific surface preparation procedures and primers used for all fabricated steel items from the fabricator/supplier to ascertain appropriate and manufacturer compatible finish coat materials to be used before painting any such work.

E. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum five years experience.

1.06 MOCK-UPA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.

B. Prepare and paint each type of surface shown as requiring finish, to requirements specified herein, with specified paint or coating showing selected colors, gloss/sheen, textures and workmanship for review and approval.1. Provide wall panel 8 feet wide by ceiling height.2. Provide door and frame assembly.3. Provide floor sample 3 foot square.

C. When approved, surfaces shall become acceptable standard of finish quality and workmanship for remainder of on-site work.

D. Locate where directed.

E. Mock-ups may remain as part of the work.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 4

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature

ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for interiors; 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 lx) measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer:1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.

B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers; subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable products from one of the following:1. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com.2. Glidden Professional, Division of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc:

www.gliddenprofessional.com.3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no exceptions.

D. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.

2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERALA. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.

1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run.

4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Utah Administrative Code R307-361 Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for interior and exterior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)].1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 100 g/L.3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 150 g/L.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 5

4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.5. Industrial maintenance Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.8. Floor Coatings Foot Traffic: 100 g/L.9. Floor Coatings High Performance: 250 g/L.10. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.11. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.12. Wood Coatings: 275 g/L.

D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds

(hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-

ethylhexyl) phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate, dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene, formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene, toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.

E. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.

F. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract.2. Allow for minimum of three colors for each room, unless otherwise indicated,

without additional cost to Owner.3. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed by Architect.4. In all areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling

they are mounted on/under, unless noted otherwise.5. In utility areas, finish equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed duct work in colors

according to the color coding scheme indicated.

2.03 PAINT AND COATING SYSTEMS - INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULEA. Concrete Floors - Satin Finish

1. Primer: ArmorSeal 8100 - B70-8160, 50 g/L.a. Reduced with one pint of water per gallon.

2. 1st coat: ArmorSeal 8100 - B70-8160, 50 g/L.3. 2nd coat: ArmorSeal 8100 - B70-8160, 50 g/L.

B. Concrete Columns and Ceilings - Satin/Egg-Shell Finish1. Primer: Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer Sealer - A24W8300, 50 g/L.2. 1st coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Egg-Shell - B20-2600 Series, 0 g/L.3. 2nd coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Egg-Shell - B20-2600 Series, 0 g/L.

C. Gypsum Walls and Ceilings - Satin/Egg-Shell Finish1. Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer - B28W2600, 0 g/L.2. 1st coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Egg-Shell - B20-2600 Series, 0 g/L.3. 2nd coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Egg-Shell - B20-2600 Series, 0 g/L.

D. Metal Doors and Frames - Semi-Gloss Finish1. Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer - B66-310 Series, 96 g/L.2. 1st coat: Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss - B66-650 Series, 50 g/L.3. 1st coat: Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss - B66-650 Series, 50 g/L.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 6

2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALSA. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding

materials, and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.

C. Obtain written certification from Manufacturer's Product Representative that surfaces are ready to receive Work.

D. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials; report incompatible primer conditions and prepare surfaces as directed by the Manufacturer.

E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.2. Concrete: 12 percent.

F. Measure the ph factor of concrete before starting any finishing process.1. Report results in writing to Architect before starting work.2. If results of test indicates need for remedial action, provide written description of remedial

action. If a different primer or paint systems is required, state the total cost of the change. Do not proceed with remedial action or change without receiving written authorization from Architect.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the Manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.

E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

F. Concrete Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.1. Prepare concrete surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease,

oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

2. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 7

3. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture is present.

4. Etch concrete as required by paint manufacturer.

G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

H. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

3.03 APPLICATIONA. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified, using the

preparation, products, sheens, textures, and colors as indicated.1. Provide completed work matching approved samples and mock up for color, texture, and

coverage.2. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.

B. Do not apply finishes over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or other conditions detrimental to formation of a durable coating film; do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.

C. Use applicators and methods best suited for substrate and type of material being applied and according to manufacturer's instructions.1. Brush Application: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied; use brush of

appropriate size for the surface or item being painted; produce results free of visible brush marks.

2. Roller Application: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

3. Spray Application: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required.

D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate; provide total dry film thickness of entire system as recommended by manufacturer.1. Number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application

method.2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional

coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance.3. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners

receive dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.4. Dark Colors and Deep Clear Colors: Regardless of number of coats specified, apply as

many coats as necessary for complete hide.

E. Apply finish to completely cover surfaces with uniform appearance without brush marks, runs, sags, laps, ropiness, holidays, spotting, cloudiness, or other surface imperfections.1. Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material recommended by

manufacturer, unless the surface has been prime coated by others; where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appear, recoat primed and sealed surfaces to ensure finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

2. Apply first coat to surface that has been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared as soon as practical after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 8

3. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer.

4. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat will not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.

5. If manufacturer's instructions recommend sanding to produce a smooth, even surface, sand between coats.

6. Before applying next coat vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.

7. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Provide smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage.

8. Stippled Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to even, fine texture; leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections; back roll final coat to achieve a uniform surface.

F. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.

G. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.

H. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.

B. All surfaces, preparation and paint applications shall be inspected.

C. Manufacturer's Product Representative to provide field inspection and written certification of product application.

D. Painted exterior and interior surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following defects are apparent to the Manufacturer's Product Representative and/or Architect:1. Brush/roller marks, streaks, laps, runs, sags, drips, heavy stippling, hiding or shadowing

by inefficient application methods, skipped or missed areas, and foreign materials in paint coatings.

2. Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plated edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets, corners and re-entrant angles.

3. Damage do to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause.4. Damage do to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection fro the

weather.5. Damage and/or contamination of paint due to blown contaminants (dust, spray paint, etc.).

E. Painted surfaces shall be considered unacceptable if any of the following are evident under natural lighting source for exterior surfaces and final lighting source (including daylight) for interior surfaces:1. Visible defects are evident on vertical surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles

from a distance of not less than 39 inches (1000 mm).2. Visible defects are evident on horizontal surfaces when viewed at normal viewing angles

from a distance of not less than 39 inches (1000 mm).3. Visible defects are evident on ceiling, soffit and other overhead surfaces when viewed at

normal viewing angles.4. When the final coat on any surface exhibits a lack of uniformity of color, sheen, texture,

and hiding across full surface area.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 9

F. Painted surfaces rejected by the Manufacturer's Product Representative and/or Architect shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor. Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas or areas without sufficient dry film thickness of paint shall be repainted. Runs and sags shall be removed by a scraper or by sanding prior to application of paint.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTIONA. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and

remove daily from site.

B. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from site.

C. Protect other work, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as approved by Architect.

D. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PAINTING AND COATING 09 9000 - 10

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

10 4400 - 1

SECTION 10 4400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fire extinguisher cabinets.

B. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 1053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution

requirements.

B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Placement of supports in stud wall construction.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide color and finish, anchorage details, and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate existing cabinet physical dimensions and rough-in measurements for semi-recessed cabinet.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories:1. Activar Construction Products Group - JL Industries: www.activarcpg.com/#sle.2. Kidde, a unit of United Technologies Corp: www.kidde.com/#sle.3. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.4. Nystrom, Inc: www.nystrom.com.5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETSA. Fire Rating: Listed and labeled in accordance with ASTM E814 requirements for fire resistance

rating of walls where being installed.

B. Cabinet Construction: Non-fire rated.1. Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick base metal.

C. Fire Rated Cabinet Construction: One-hour fire rated.1. Steel; double wall or outer and inner boxes with 5/8 inch (15.9 mm) thick fire barrier

material.

D. Metal: Formed steel sheet; 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick base metal.

E. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type.1. Sized to accommodate accessories, verify sizes with Owner and Architect.2. Trim: Rolled edge returned to wall surface.3. Provide cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams, and with formed

perimeter trim and door stiles.

F. Door: 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide roller type catch. Vertical duo style.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

10 4400 - 2

G. Door Glazing: Acrylic plastic, clear, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, flat shape and set in resilient channel glazing gasket.

H. Door Lettering: Die cut lettering, white, vertical, "Fire Extinguisher".

I. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet, with pre-drilled holes for placement of anchors.

J. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.

K. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, White color.

L. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White colored enamel.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Lettering: “FIRE EXTINGUISHER” decal, or vinyl self-adhering, pre-spaced black lettering in

accordance with authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install cabinets plumb and level.

C. Secure rigidly in place.END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 3013 - 1

SECTION 11 3013 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Kitchen appliances.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical connections for appliances.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each piece of residential equipment specified.

C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

section, with not less than five years of documented experience.

B. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL (DIR) and complying with NEMA Standards (National Electrical Manufacturers Association).

1.06 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES

A. Provide Equipment Eligible for Energy Star Rating: Energy Star Rated.

B. Refrigerator: Free-standing, undercounter, and ADA compliant.1. Designed to fit under 34 inch high ADA compliant counters.2. Exterior Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range.3. Manufacturers:

a. Accucold: www.accucold.com.b. GE Appliances: www.geappliances.com/#sle.c. Whirlpool Corp: www.whirlpool.com/#sle.d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify utility rough-ins are provided and correctly located.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11 3013 - 2

3.03 ADJUSTINGA. Adjust equipment to provide efficient operation.

3.04 CLEANINGA. Remove packing materials from equipment and properly discard.

B. Wash and clean equipment.END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 1

SECTION 12 3600 - COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work.

B. Support brackets.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework.

B. Division 22 - Plumbing Fixtureres.

1.03 SUBMITTALSA. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.3. Specimen warranty.

C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

F. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.

G. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.

H. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this

section, with not less than five years of documented experience.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 2

B. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plastic resin self-supporting over structural members.1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 3 cm, minimum.2. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets, Slabs and Castings: Complying with ISFA

3-01 and NEMA LD 3; orthophthalic polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.a. Manufacturers:

1) Caesarstone: www.caesarstoneus.com.2) Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

b. Factory fabricate components to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapes indicated; comply with the MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual.

c. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smoke developed index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

d. NSF approved for food contact.e. Color and Pattern: 6141 Ocean Foam.

3. Exposed Edge Treatment: Eased edge.4. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches (102 mm)

high.5. Skirts: As indicated on drawings.

2.02 MATERIALSA. Grommets: Standard plastic grommets for cut-outs, in color to blend with adjacent surface.

B. Cantilevered Support Brackets: Steel, painted white.1. Dimensions: Size to accommodate depth of countertop as indicated on Drawings.2. Load Capacity: 1,100 lbs.3. Acceptable Product: Hafele Hebgo Bracket or approved equal.

C. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being joined.

D. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, clear.

2.03 FABRICATIONA. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.

1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch (25 mm) except where top butts

against cabinet or wall.3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or

unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.

B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated.1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof

glue.2. Height: 4 inches (102 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

C. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on drawings, finished to match.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 3

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are installed in proper locations.

3.02 PREPARATIONA. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.03 INSTALLATIONA. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners or adhesive. Make flat

surfaces level; shim where required.

B. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.

3.04 TOLERANCESA. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), maximum.

B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum; 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) minimum.

C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide, maximum.

3.05 CLEANINGA. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CO001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COUNTERTOPS 12 3600 - 4

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1

SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Transition fittings.3. Dielectric fittings.4. Mechanical sleeve seals.5. Sleeves.6. Escutcheons.7. Grout.8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.9. Painting and finishing.10. Concrete bases.11. Supports and anchorages.12. Link Seal

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, and crawlspaces.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms, accessible pipe shafts, accessible plumbing chases and accessible tunnels.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:1. Transition fittings.2. Dielectric fittings.3. Mechanical sleeve seals.4. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 3

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.b. Fernco, Inc.c. Mission Rubber Company.d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 4

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Eclipse, Inc.d. Epco Sales, Inc.e. Hart Industries, International, Inc.f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Epco Sales, Inc.d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Central Plastics Company.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Calpico, Inc.b. Lochinvar Corp.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 5

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Perfection Corp.b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Metraflex Co.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates

to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 6

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

D. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.9 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.10 LINK SEAL

A. Link-Seal® Modular Seal Pressure Plates

1. Link-Seal® modular seal pressure plates shall be molded of glass reinforced Nylon Polymer with the following properties:

a. Izod Impact - Notched = 2.05ft-lb/in. per ASTM D-256Flexural Strength @ Yield = 30,750 psi per ASTM D-790Flexural Modulus = 1,124,000 psi per ASTM D-790Elongation Break = 11.07% per ASTM D-638Specific Gravity = 1.38 per ASTM D-792

2. Models LS200-275-300-315 shall incorporate the most current Link-Seal® Modular Seal design modifications and shall include an integrally molded compression assist boss on the top (bolt entry side) of the pressure plate, which permits increased compressive loading of the rubber sealing element. Models 315-325-340-360-400-410-425-475-500-525-575-600 shall incorporate an integral recess known as a “Hex Nut Interlock” designed to accommodate commercially available fasteners to insure proper thread engagement for the class and service of metal hardware. All pressure plates shall have a permanent identification of the manufacturer’s name molded into it.

3. For fire and Hi-Temp service, pressure plates shall be steel with 2-part Zinc Dichromate Coating.

4. Link-Seal® Modular Seal Hardware: All fasteners shall be sized according to latest Link-Seal® modular seal technical data. Bolts, flange hex nuts shall be: 316 Stainless Steel per ASTM F593-95, with a 85,000 psi average tensile strength.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" and Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with SEI/ASCE 7 and with requirements for seismic seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.3 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 8

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish.c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-

steel type.f. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping: Use the following:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.b. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-

brass type with chrome-plated finish.c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-

steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass

type with chrome-plated finish.e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel

type with concealed hinge and set screw.f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type.g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw or

spring clips.h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate

type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 9

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions.c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 10

3.4 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

J. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 11

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.6 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.8 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.9 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 12

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.10 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.11 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 220500

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING 220518 - 1

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Escutcheons.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to 2 inch (50mm), tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING 220518 - 2

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with chrome-plated finishd. Bare Piping 2 inch and Smaller at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces:

One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.e. Bare Piping Larger than 2 inch at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces:

One-piece, stamped-steel type with polished, chrome-plated finish f. Bare Piping 2 inch and Smaller at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-

piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.g. Bare Piping Larger than 2 inch at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-

piece, stamped-steel type with polished, chrome-plated finish h. Bare Piping 2 inch and Smaller in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated or rough-brass finish.i. Bare Piping Larger than 2 inch in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type with polished, chrome-plated finish j. Bare Piping 2 inch and Smaller in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass

type with polished, chrome-plated or rough-brass finish.

2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

b. Insulated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.

END OF SECTION 220518

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220523 - 1

SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Bronze angle valves.2. Bronze ball valves.3. Bronze lift check valves.4. Bronze swing check valves.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3. Division 33 water distribution piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site construction piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. RS: Rising stem.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220523 - 2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.3. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.4. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves.3. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5

plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220523 - 3

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

F. Valve-End Connections:1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Hammond Valve.b. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.d. Ends: Threaded.e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.f. Packing: Asbestos free.g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. American Valve, Inc.b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.d. Hammond Valve.e. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.f. Milwaukee Valve Company.g. NIBCO INC.h. Red-White Valve Corporation.i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220523 - 4

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.d. Body Design: Two piece.e. Body Material: Bronze.f. Ends: Threaded.g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.h. Stem: Bronze.i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.j. Port: Full.

B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.c. Hammond Valve.d. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.e. Milwaukee Valve Company.f. NIBCO INC.g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.d. Body Design: Two piece.e. Body Material: Bronze.f. Ends: Threaded.g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.h. Stem: Stainless steel.i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.j. Port: Full.

C. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.b. DynaQuip Controls.c. Hammond Valve.d. Milwaukee Valve Company.e. NIBCO INC.f. Red-White Valve Corporation.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220523 - 5

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.d. Body Design: Three piece.e. Body Material: Bronze.f. Ends: Threaded.g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.h. Stem: Bronze.i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.j. Port: Full.

D. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.b. Hammond Valve.c. Milwaukee Valve Company.d. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.d. Body Design: Three piece.e. Body Material: Bronze.f. Ends: Threaded.g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.h. Stem: Stainless steel.i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.j. Port: Full.

2.4 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. Body Design: Vertical flow.d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze.e. Ends: Threaded.f. Disc: Bronze.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220523 - 6

2.5 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. American Valve, Inc.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.e. Hammond Valve.f. Kitz Corporation.g. Milwaukee Valve Company.h. NIBCO INC.i. Powell Valves.j. Red-White Valve Corporation.k. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.l. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.e. Ends: Threaded.f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. American Valve, Inc.b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.e. Kitz Corporation.f. Milwaukee Valve Company.g. NIBCO INC.h. Red-White Valve Corporation.i. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.b. CWP Rating: 300 psig.c. Body Design: Horizontal flow.d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.e. Ends: Threaded.f. Disc: Bronze.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220523 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball valves.2. Throttling Service Globe, angle, ball or butterfly valves.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

220523 - 8

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125 or Class 150, bronze disc.3. Ball Valves: One, Two or Three piece, full or, regular port, bronze with bronze or

stainless-steel trim.4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125 or Class 150, bronze disc.5. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125 or Class 150, bronze disc.

END OF SECTION 220523

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Trapeze pipe hangers.3. Metal framing systems.4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.5. Fastener systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."

1.4 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Component Importance Factor. All plumbing components shall be assigned a component importance factor. The component importance factor, Ip, shall be taken as 1.5 if any of the following conditions apply:

1. The component is required to function for life-safety purposes after an earthquake.2. The component contains hazardous materials.3. The component is in or attached to an Occupancy Category IV structure and it is needed

for continued operation of the facility or its failure could impair the continued operation of the facility.

B. All other components shall be assigned a component importance factor, Ip, equal to 1.0.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 2

B. Seismic Performance: Plumbing equipment, hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 and with the requirements specified in Section 220548 " Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

1. For components with a seismic importance factor of 1.0 the term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

2. For components with a seismic importance factor of 1.5 the term "withstand" means "the system will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the system will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.4. Mechanical Anchors: ICC-ES Evaluation Reports validating ‘Cracked Concrete’ testing

per A.C. 193 must be provided for anchors resisting seismic loads and/or supporting life- safety systems including fire sprinkler systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and alignment guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure.

2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops.3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior

walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls.4. Seismic calculations and detailed analysis: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail

attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices. Project specific design documentation and calculations shall be prepared and stamped by a registered professional engineer who is responsible for the seismic restraint design and who is licensed in the state where the project is being constructed (ASCE 7, 13.2.1.1).

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 3

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel.", AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."3. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Anvil International.2. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.3. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.4. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.5. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.6. Empire Industries, Inc.7. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.8. FNW/Ferguson Enterprises9. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.10. Grinnell Corp.11. GS Metals Corp.12. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.13. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.14. PHS Industries, Inc.15. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.16. Tolco Inc.17. Simpson Strong-Tie Co.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 4

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Anvil International.2. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.3. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.4. FNW/Ferguson Enterprises5. GS Metals Corp.6. Hilti, Inc.7. Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.8. Thomas & Betts Corporation.9. Tolco Inc.10. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.3. PHS Industries, Inc.4. Pipe Shields, Inc.5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 5

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with vapor barrier.

D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc.b. MKT Fastening, LLC.c. Powers Fasteners.d. Simpson Strong-Tie Co.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors and Concrete Screws: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. For anchors resisting seismic loads and/or supporting life- safety systems including fire sprinkler systems, Anchors shall have been tested for ‘Cracked Concrete’ per A.C. 193 per a valid ICC-ES Evaluation Report. Manufacturers with these anchors have been designated below with: ‘*’

1. Manufacturers:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.b. Empire Industries, Inc.c. Hilti, Inc.d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.e. MKT Fastening, LLC.f. Powers Fasteners.g. Simpson Strong-Tie Co. *

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 6

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.

10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 7

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18 or Simpson Blue Banger Concrete insert with UL & FM approvals): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 8

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-

1/4 inches.3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with

springs.4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 9

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SEI/ASCE 7 and with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

C. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

E. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

F. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 10

according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Powder actuated fasteners shall not be used for seismic bracing attachments.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. For anchors resisting seismic loads and/or supporting life-safety systems including fire sprinkler systems, anchors shall have been tested for ‘Cracked Concrete’ per A.C. 193 and shall have a valid ICC-ES Evaluation Report

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

N. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 11

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches .

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220529 - 12

B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 220529

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220553 - 1

SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Equipment labels.2. Warning signs and labels.3. Pipe labels.4. Stencils.5. Valve tags.6. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220553 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White.3. Background Color: Blue.4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: Black.

C. Background Color: Yellow.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220553 - 3

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.4 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch for access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may

be in pressurized spray-can form.3. Identification Paint: Exterior, alkyd enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless

otherwise indicated.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220553 - 4

2.6 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum.2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT

OPERATE."4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09.

B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.

C. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220553 - 5

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feetalong each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

D. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Low-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping:

a. Background Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.b. Letter Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.

2. Medium-Pressure, Compressed-Air Piping:

a. Background Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.b. Letter Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.

3. Domestic Water Piping:

a. Background Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.b. Letter Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.

4. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.b. Letter Color: Comply with ASME A13.1.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round.c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: 1-1/2 inches, round.d. High-Pressure Compressed Air: 1-1/2 inches, round.

2. Valve-Tag Color:

a. Cold Water: Comply with ASME A13.1.b. Hot Water: Comply with ASME A13.1.c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: Comply with ASME A13.1.d. High-Pressure Compressed Air: Comply with ASME A13.1.

3. Letter Color:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220553 - 6

a. Cold Water: Comply with ASME A13.1.b. Hot Water: Comply with ASME A13.1.c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: Comply with ASME A13.1.d. High-Pressure Compressed Air: Comply with ASME A13.1.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.

END OF SECTION 220553

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 1

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION.

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping. 3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS:

A. Refer to Section 220500 “Common Work Results for Plumbing”.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail attachment and covering of heat tracing inside insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 4. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation. 5. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels. 6. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 7. Detail application at linkages of control devices.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 2

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.9 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Insulation for below-ambient service requires a vapor-barrier.

C. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

D. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

E. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

F. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

G. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.

H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553: 1. Type II and ASTM C 1290, Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-

Applied Jackets" Article.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

I. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 4

2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, a. Without factory-applied jacket with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied

jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

J. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-75. d. K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-60/85-70. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 5

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-82.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-20. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Speedline Corporation; Polyco VP Adhesive.

2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/30-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F . 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 6

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-30.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 501. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 30-35. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-10.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F . 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

D. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Encacel.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 570. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 60-95/60-96.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 30-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 220 deg F . 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

E. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-10.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 550. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 46-50. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50. e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F . 4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 7

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F . 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: Color-code jackets based on system.

a. White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

C. Metal Jacket:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 8

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing or factory cut and rolled to size. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene

and kraft paper. [3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper] [2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn].

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. [2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn].

e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

2.8 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836. c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 370 White PVC tape. b. Compac Corporation; 130. c. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 9

3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. c. Compac Corporation; 120. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

2.10 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following:

a. Engineered Brass Company. b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a subsidiary of MVG Molded Products. c. McGuire Manufacturing. d. Plumberex. e. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation. f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following:

a. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation. b. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 10

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 11

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at: a. 2 inches o.c. b. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 12

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 13

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 14

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive

to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 15

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at

least 1 inch , and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 16

3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Insulation shall have a k value that meets the minimum requirements of the latest International Energy Conservation Code (IECC).

C. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following;

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1) 1 inch thick

b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1) 1 inch thick

2. NPS 2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1) 1-1/2 inches thick.

b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1) 1-1/2 inches thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1) 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 2 and Larger: Insulation shall be one of the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1) 1-1/2 inches thick

3.11 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 17

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed:

1. None. 2. PVC:

a. White: 20 mils thick

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC: a. White: 30 mils thick

3.12 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed:

1. None.

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.016 inch thick.

END OF SECTION 220719

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 220719 - 18

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.

2. Encasement for piping.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and alignment guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure.

2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops.3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior

walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 2

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager or owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."

C. All piping shall be American made and tested; no import pipe will be permitted.

D. All exposed water supply piping in toilet rooms, custodial rooms and kitchens shall be chromium plated.

E. All piping installed in or passing through a plenum must be plenum rated, fire wrapped, or installed in a metal conduit.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.

D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 3

2.3 PP PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PP Pipe: ASTM F 2389, SDR 7.4 and SDR 11.

B. PP Socket Fittings: ASTM F 2389.

2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

F. PP Pipe and Fittings: Manufacturer’s recommended fusion-weld system.

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:

1. Same size as pipes to be joined.2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing.b. Dresser, Inc.; Piping Specialties Products.c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).d. JCM Industries.e. Romac Industries, Inc.f. Smith-Blair, Inc.; a Sensus company.g. Viking Johnson.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 4

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company.b. Harvel Plastics, Inc.c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description:

a. CPVC or PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions.

b. One end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-socket or threaded end.

E. PP-to-Metal Transition Fittings:

1. Description:

a. PP one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions.b. One end with threaded brass insert and one fusion-socket end.

F. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Colonial Engineering, Inc.b. NIBCO Inc.c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description:

a. CPVC four-part union.b. Brass threaded end.c. Solvent-cement-joint plastic end.d. Rubber O-ring.e. Union nut.

2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Nipples and Waterways:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Elster Perfection Corporation.b. Grinnell Mechanical Products; Tyco Fire Products LP.c. Matco-Norca.d. Clearflow/Perfection Corp.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 5

e. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.f. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66 or ASTM F-1545-97.3. Electroplated steel nipple or waterway complying with ASTM F 1545 or ANSI/NSF-61

Compliant.4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene or LTHS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Polypropylene pipe in or passing through plenums must be fire wrapped or installed in a metal conduit.

C. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

D. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

E. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

F. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

G. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

H. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

I. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 6

1. Piping will be drained seasonally for freeze protection.

J. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

K. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with SEI/ASCE 7 and with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

L. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

M. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

N. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

O. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

P. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Install piping free of sags and bends.

R. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

S. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

T. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps."

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 7

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Roll groove ends of tubes. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of tubes or tube and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in tubing grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.

G. Joint Construction for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Cut round-bottom grooves in ends of pipe at gasket-seat dimension required for specified (flexible or rigid) joint. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.

H. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Steel Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Roll groove ends of pipe as specified. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.

I. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

J. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 8

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings.

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples/waterways.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric nipples/waterways.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric nipples/waterways.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 9

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod.8. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod.

H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

I. Install supports for vertical PP piping every 60 inches for NPS 1 and smaller, and every 72 inches for NPS 1-1/4 and larger.

J. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements for connection sizes in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections.

4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 10

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 11

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 12

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Some piping types and sizes mentioned in this section may not be used on this project.

B. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

D. All exposed water supply piping in toilet rooms, custodial rooms and kitchens shall be chromium plated.

E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered

joints.2. PP, SDR 7.4 for domestic hot water; socket fittings; and fusion-welded joints.3. PP, SDR 7.4 for domestic cold water; socket fittings; and fusion-welded joints.

3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball for piping NPS 3 and smaller. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smallerHot-Water Circulation 3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.

END OF SECTION 221116

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:1. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves.2. Strainers.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Dual-Check-Valve Backflow Preventers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Cash Acme.b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls.d. Flomatic Corporation.e. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).f. Honeywell Water Controls.g. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.h. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div.i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1024.3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications.4. Body: Bronze with union inlet.

2.2 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Cash Acme.b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.c. Honeywell Water Controls.d. Lawler Manufacturing Company, Inc.e. Leonard Valve Company.f. Powers; a Watts Industries Co.g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled water tempering valve.3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components.5. Temperature Control: Adjustable.6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded.7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 3

2.3 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated.2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch.b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch.c. Strainers NPS 5 and Larger: 0.10 inch.

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system.

C. Install water control valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

D. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 4

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.

END OF SECTION 221119

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.2. Specialty pipe fittings.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

B. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 2

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping, and "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: All cast-iron waste, vent and sewer pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301 and ASTM A 888. All products shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Soil Pipe Institute and shall be listed by NSF International or receive prior approval of the engineer. All cast-iron pipe and fittings shall be American made and tested. Non-compliant import cast-iron products will not be permitted. Any non-compliant cast-iron product installed by the contractor on this project will be replaced at the contractor’s expense and shall include all repairs, patching, painting and other incidental work required to return the project to its pre-remediation state.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. AB&I Foundryb. Charoltte Pipec. Tyler Pipe

B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. ANACO.b. Idealc. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc.d. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.4. Listing: Couplings shall be listed by NSF International. Each coupling shall be embossed

with the NSF seal.

C. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 3

a. Husky SD 4000.b. Clamp-All Corp HI-TORQ 125.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540.3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and

ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

B. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.

C. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656.

1. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 4

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with SEI/ASCE 7 and with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

K. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

L. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

M. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping.2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

O. Install underground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321.

P. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

Q. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 5

requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

3. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.

R. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

B. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. 2. Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments. 3. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments.5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.6. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 6

7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling or valve and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inchod.4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod.6. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to

60 inches.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for cleanouts and drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

6. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 7

E. Make fixture and equipment connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 8

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 3 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

C. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 3 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 3 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

2. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

E. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and larger shall be the following:

1. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

2. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.3. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

END OF SECTION 221316

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Floor drains.2. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.

1.3 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Component Importance Factor. All plumbing components shall be assigned a component importance factor. The component importance factor, Ip, shall be taken as 1.5 if any of the following conditions apply:

1. The component is required to function for life-safety purposes after an earthquake.2. The component contains hazardous materials.3. The component is in or attached to an Occupancy Category IV structure and it is needed

for continued operation of the facility or its failure could impair the continued operation of the facility.

B. All other components shall be assigned a component importance factor, Ip, equal to 1.0.

C. Seismic Performance: Plumbing equipment, hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 and with the requirements specified in Section 220548 " Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

B. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control test reports.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 2

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: See Schedule at end of this Section:

a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.g. Sun Drainage Products

3. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.4. Body Material: Gray iron.5. Seepage Flange: Required.6. Anchor Flange: Not required.7. Outlet: Bottom.8. Trap Material: Cast iron>.9. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap>.10. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection>.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inch- minimum water seal.b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.

B. Air-Gap Fittings:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 3

1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.

2. Body: Bronze or cast iron.3. Inlet: Opening in top of body.4. Outlet: Larger than inlet.5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated

indirect waste piping.

C. Sleeve Flashing Device:

1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inch > above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab.

2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping.

D. Vent Cap Filters:

1. Description: Activated carbon filter in housing for installation at vent terminal as manufactured by Sweet Filter.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping.4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

D. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

E. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

F. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 4

G. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.

END OF SECTION 221319

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:

1. Faucets sinks.2. Protective shielding guards.3. Kitchen sinks.

B. Related Sections include the following:1. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor

drains, and specialty fixtures not included in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

B. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

D. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.

E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

F. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 2

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures:

1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M.2. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M.3. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1.4. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME A112.19.3.5. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1.3. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings: ASSE 1021.4. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409.5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.6. NSF61 Appendage G-AB 1953. Lead free potable drinking faucets.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6.2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3.3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 3

4. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.5. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.6. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINK FAUCETS

A. Sink Faucets:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Chicago Faucets.b. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.c. Moen, Inc.

2.2 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Engineered Brass Co.b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a Subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.c. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.d. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc.e. TCI Products.f. TRUEBRO, Inc.g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. Product shall also meet the ASTM E 84 25/450 smoke and flame rating.

B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 4

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. TRUEBRO, Inc.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

2.3 COMMERCIAL SINKS

A. Commercial Sinks:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Elkay Manufacturing Co.b. Just Manufacturing Company.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

C. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

D. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 5

E. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

F. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

G. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

H. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

I. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

J. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

L. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

U. All plumbing fixtures are to be mounted at the height specified on the Architectural drawings.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 6

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow and stream.

C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts.

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.

END OF SECTION 224000

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 1

SECTION 23 0100 - MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The General Conditions of the Contract, with the amendments, supplements, forms and requirements in Division 1, and herewith made a part of this Division.

B. All sections of Division 21, 22, & 23 shall comply with the Mechanical General Requirements. The standards established in this section as to quality of materials and equipment, the type and quality of workmanship, mode of operations, safety rules, code requirements, etc., shall apply to all sections of this Division as though they were repeated in each Division.

C. Mechanical equipment that is pre-purchased if any will be assigned to the Mechanical Contractor. By assignment to the Mechanical Contractor, the Mechanical Contractor shall accept and installed the equipment and provide all warrantees and guarantees as if the Mechanical Contractor had purchased the equipment.

D. Construction Indoor-Air Quality Management1. Comply with SMACNA’s “SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under

Construction.”a. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems

during construction period as specified in Division 01 Section “Temporary Facilities and Controls,” install filter media having a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return-air inlet for the air-handling system used during construction.

b. Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The project described herein is the USU CCA Academic Advising Center Renovation Project. This work shall include all labor, materials, equipment, fixtures, and devices for the entire mechanical work and a complete operating and tested installation as required for this project.

1.3 CODES & ORDINANCES

A. All work shall be executed in accordance with all underwriters, public utilities, local and state rules and regulations applicable to the trade affected. Should any change in the plans and Specifications be required to comply with these regulations, the Contractor shall notify the Architect before the time of submitting his bid. After entering into contract, the Contractor will be held to complete all work necessary to meet these requirements without extra expense to the Owner. Where work required by drawings or specifications is above the standard required, it shall be done as shown or specified.

B. Applicable codes:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 2

1. Utah Boiler and Pressure Vessel Rules and Regulations-2019 Edition2. International Building code- 2018 Edition3. International Mechanical Code- 2018 Edition4. International Plumbing Code- 2018 Edition5. International Fire Code- 2018 Edition6. International Energy Code- 2018 Edition7. International Fuel Gas Code- 2018 Edition8. National Electrical Code- 2017 Edition

1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. All work shall comply with the following standards.1. Associated Air Balance council (AABC)2. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)3. Air Diffusion council (ADC)4. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)5. American Gas Association (AGA)6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)7. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)8. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)9. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)10. American Water Works Association (AWWA)11. Cooling Tower Institute (CTI)12. ETL Testing Laboratories (ETL)13. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)14. Hydronics Institute (HI)15. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry (MSS)16. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)17. National Electrical Code (NEC)18. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)19. National Electrical Safety code (NESC)20. Utah safety Standard (OSHA), Utah State Industrial Council.21. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA)22. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)23. Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, Inc. (TEMA)24. Heat Exchanger Institute (HEI)25. Hydraulic Institute (HI)26. Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association (TIMA)27. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA)

B. Compliance Verification:1. All items required by code or specified to conform to the ASME code shall be stamped

with the ASME seal.2. Form U-1, the manufacturers data report for pressure vessels, is to be included in the

Operation and Maintenance Manuals. National Board Register (NBR) numbers shall be provided where required by code.

3. Manufactured equipment which is represented by a UL classification and/or listing, shall bear the UL or equivalent ETL label.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 3

1.5 UTILITIES & FEES

A. All fees for permits required by this work will be paid by this division. The contractor shall obtain the necessary permits to perform this work. Unless noted otherwise, all systems furnished and or installed by this Contractor, shall be complete with all utilities, components, commodities and accessories required for a fully functioning system. This Contractor shall furnish smoke generators when required for testing, furnish glycol for glycol piping systems, full load of salt to fill brine tank for water softening system, furnish cleaners and water treatment additives.

1.6 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. General: As soon as possible after the contract is awarded, but in no case more than 45 calendar days thereafter, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect manufacturer’s data on products and materials to be used in the installation of mechanical systems for this project. The review of the submitted data will require a minimum of 14 days. The first day starts after the day they are received in the engineer’s office to which the project is being constructed from. If the Contractors schedule requires return of submitted literature in less than the allotted time, the Contractor shall accelerate his submittal delivery date. The Contractor shall resubmit all items requiring re-review within 14 days of returned submittals. Refer to each specification section for items requiring submittal review. If the re-submittal is returned a 2nd time for correction the Contractor will provide the specific equipment that is specified on the drawings and/or the specifications. Written approval of the Owner's Representative shall be obtained before installing any such equipment or materials for the project.

B. Review by the Owner's Representative is for general conformance of the submitted equipment to the project specification. In no way does such review relieve this Contractor of his obligation to furnish equipment and materials that comply in detail to the specification nor does it relieve the Contractor of his obligation to determine actual field dimensions and conditions that may affect his work. Regardless of any items overlooked by the submittal review, the requirements of the contract drawings and specifications must be followed and are not waived or superseded in any way by the review.

C. By description, catalog number, and manufacturer's names, standards of quality have been established by the Architect and the Engineer for certain manufactured equipment items and specialties that are to be furnished by this Division. Alternate products and equipment may be proposed for use only if specifically named in the specifications or if given written prior approval in published addenda. Design equipment is the equipment listed on the drawings or if not listed on the drawings is the equipment first named in the specifications.

D. If the Engineer is required to do additional design work to incorporate changes caused by submitting equipment or products, different than the design equipment specified, as defined above, the contractor shall reimburse the engineer for additional time and expenses at the engineer’s current, recognized, hourly rates.

E. Submittal Format: At the contractor’s discretion, project submittals may be in either of the formats described in the following paragraphs, but mixing the two formats is not acceptable.

1. Hardcopy Submittal Format: Six (6) copies of the descriptive literature covering products and materials to be used in the installation of mechanical systems for this project will be provided for review. The submittals shall be prepared in an orderly manner, contained in

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 4

a 3-ring loose-leaf binder with index and identification tab for each item or group of items and for each specification section. All items shall be submitted at one time except automatic temperature control drawings and seismic restraint drawings which may be submitted separately within 120 days of the contract award date. Partial submittals will not be reviewed until the complete submittal is received.a. Submitted literature shall bear the Contractor's stamp, indicating that he has

checked all equipment being submitted; that each item will fit into the available space with the accesses shown on the drawings; and, further, that each item conforms to the capacity and quality standards given in the contract documents.

b. Submitted literature shall clearly indicate performance, quality, and utility requirements; shall show dimension and size of connection points; and shall include derating factors that were applied for each item of equipment to provide capacity at job site elevation. Temperature control submittals shall include piping and wiring diagrams, sequence of operation and equipment. Equipment must fit into the available space with allowance for operation, maintenance, etc. Factory piped and wired equipment shall include shop drawings for all internal wiring and piping furnished with the unit.

c. Submitted literature shall clearly show all required field install wiring, piping, and accessory installations required by the Contractor to provide a complete operating system.

2. Electronic Submittal Format: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:a. All items shall be submitted at one time except automatic temperature control

drawings and seismic restraint drawings which may be submitted separately within 120 days of the contract award date. Partial submittals will not be reviewed until the complete submittal is received.

b. Submitted electronic file shall bear the Contractor's stamp, indicating that he has checked all equipment being submitted; that each item will fit into the available space with the accesses shown on the drawings; and, further, that each item conforms to the capacity and quality standards given in the contract documents.

c. Submitted electronic file shall clearly indicate performance, quality, and utility requirements; shall show dimension and size of connection points; and shall include derating factors that were applied for each item of equipment to provide capacity at job site elevation. Temperature control submittals shall include piping and wiring diagrams, sequence of operation and equipment. Equipment must fit into the available space with allowance for operation, maintenance, etc. Factory piped and wired equipment shall include shop drawings for all internal wiring and piping furnished with the unit.

d. Submitted electronic file shall clearly show all required field install wiring, piping, and accessory installations required by the Contractor to provide a complete operating system.

e. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

f. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

g. Electronic file shall be completely electronically searchable or it will be rejected.

h. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 5

1) Architect.i. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals:

1) Use one of the following options acceptable to the Owner;

a) Software-generated form from electronic project management software.

b) Electronic form.

2) The Electronic Submittal shall contain the following information:a) Project name.b) Date.c) Name and address of Architect.d) Name of Construction Manager.e) Name of Contractor.f) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.g) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.h) Category and type of submittal.i) Submittal purpose and description.j) Specification Section number and title.k) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic

name for each of multiple items.l) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.m) Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.n) Related physical samples submitted directly.o) Indication of full or partial submittal.p) Transmittal number[, numbered consecutively].q) Submittal and transmittal distribution record.r) Other necessary identification.s) Remarks.

j. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:

1) Project name.2) Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.3) Manufacturer name.4) Product name.

1.7 DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS

A. Construction Drawings: The contract document drawings show the general design, arrangements, and extent of the system. In certain cases, the drawings may include details that show more nearly exact locations and arrangements; however, the locations, as shown diagrammatically, are to be regarded as general.

B. It shall be the work of this Section to make such slight alterations as may be necessary to make adjustable parts fit to fixed parts, leaving all complete and in proper shape when done. All dimensions given on the drawings shall be verified as related to this work and with the Architect's office before work is started.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 6

C. This Section shall carefully study building sections, space, clearances, etc., and then provide offsets in piping or ductwork as required to accommodate the building structure without additional cost to the Owner. In any case and at any time during the construction process, a change in location required by obstacles or the installation of other trades not shown on the mechanical plans shall be made without charge.

D. The drawings shall not be scaled for roughing in measurements nor shall they be used as shop drawings. Where drawings are required for these purposes or where drawings must be made from field measurements, the Contractor shall take the necessary measurements and prepare the drawings. Shop drawings of the various subcontractors shall be coordinated to eliminate all interferences and to provide sufficient space for the installation of all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc.

E. The drawings and specifications have been prepared to supplement each other and they shall be interpreted as an integral unit with items shown on one and not the other being furnished and installed as though shown and called out on both.

F. Coordination Drawings: The contractor shall provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms, fan rooms, equipment rooms, and congested areas to eliminate conflicts with equipment, piping, or work of other trades. The drawings shall be a minimum scale of 1/4 inch= 1 foot and of such detail as may be required by the Engineer to fully illustrate the work. These drawings shall include all piping, conduit, valves, equipment, and ductwork.

G. Sheet-metal shop drawings will be required for all ductwork in the entire building. These drawings will show all ductwork in the entire building and shall be coordinated with architectural, structural and electrical portions of the project. The contractor shall specifically obtain copies of the structural shop drawings and shall coordinate the ductwork shop drawings with approved structural members. These drawings shall be submitted to the engineer for review prior to any fabrication. The contractor is responsible for all modifications necessary to accommodate duct installation within the structural, architectural and electrical restrictions. These drawings, once reviewed by the engineer, will be made available to all mechanical, electrical, and fire sprinkler subcontractors to coordinate installation of their work.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF BUILDING EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor may use equipment such as electric motors, fans, heat exchangers, filters, etc., with the written permission of the Owner. As each piece of equipment is used (such as electric motors and fans), maintenance procedures approved by the manufacturer are to be followed. A careful record is to be kept of the length of the time the equipment is used, maintenance procedures followed, and any difficulty encountered. The record is to be submitted to the Owner upon acceptance. All fan belts and filter media (such as bearings) shall be carefully inspected just prior to acceptance. Any excessive wear noted shall require replacement. New filter media shall be installed in air handlers at the time systems are turned over to the owner.

1.9 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall carefully examine all existing conditions that might affect the mechanical system and shall compare these conditions with all drawings and specifications for work included under this contract. He shall, at such time, ascertain and check all conditions that may

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 7

affect his work. No allowance shall subsequently be made in his behalf for an extra expense incurred as a result of his failure or neglect to make such examination. This Contractor shall include in his bid proposal all necessary allowances to repair or replace any item that will remain or will be removed, and any item that will be damaged or destroyed by new construction.

B. The Contractor shall remove all abandoned piping, etc., required by new construction and cap or plug openings. No capping, etc., shall be exposed in occupied areas. All openings of items removed shall be sealed to match adjacent surfaces.

C. The Contractor shall verify the exact location of all existing services, utilities, piping, etc., and make connections to existing systems as required or as shown on the drawings. The exact location of each utility line, together with size and elevation, shall be established before any on-site lines are installed. Should elevation or size of existing main utility lines make connections to them impossible as shown on drawings, then notification of such shall immediately be given to the Owners Representative for a decision.

1.10 EQUIPMENT CAPACITIES

A. Capacities shown for equipment in the specifications and on the drawings are the minimum acceptable. No equipment shall be considered as an alternate that has capacities or performance less than that of design equipment.

B. All equipment shall give the specified capacity and performance at the job-site elevation. Manufacturers' standard ratings shall be adjusted accordingly. All capacities and performances listed on drawings or in specifications are for job-site conditions.

1.11 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT

A. All equipment shall be furnished structurally adequate to withstand seismic forces as outlined in the International Building Code. Refer to section Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints. Equipment bases shall be designed for direct attachment of seismic snubbers and/or seismic anchors.

1.12 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES

A. The Contractor shall refer to other drawings and parts of this specification that cover work of other trades that is carried on in conjunction with the mechanical work such that all work can proceed without interference resulting from lack of coordination.

B. The Contractor shall properly size and locate all openings, chases, sleeves, equipment bases, and accesses. He shall provide accurate wiring diagrams to the Electrical Contractor for all equipment furnished under this Division.

C. The ceiling cavity must be carefully reviewed and coordinated with all trades. In the event of conflict, the installation of the mechanical equipment and piping shall be in the following order: plumbing, waste, and soil lines; supply, return, and exhaust ductwork; water piping; medical gases; fire protection piping; and pneumatic control piping.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 8

D. The mechanical Contractor shall insure that the installation of all piping, ducts and equipment is in compliance with Articles 110-16 and 384-4 of the National Electrical Code relative to proper clearances in front of and over all electrical panels and equipment. No piping or ductwork will be allowed to run over electrical panel.

1.13 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR

A. The Contractor is responsible for the installation of a satisfactory piece of work in accordance with the true intent of the drawings and specifications. He shall provide, as a part of his work and without expense, all incidental items required even though these items are not particularly specified or indicated. The installation shall be made so that its several component parts will function together as a workable system and shall be left with all equipment properly adjusted and in working order. The Contractor shall familiarize the Owner's Representative with maintenance and lubrication instructions as prepared by the Contractor and shall explain and fully instruct him relative to operating, servicing, and maintenance of them.

B. If a conflict arises between the drawings and the specifications the most stringent procedure/action shall be followed. A clarification to the engineer will help to determine the course of action to be taken. If a conflict arises between specification sections the engineer will determine which course of action is to be followed.

1.14 PIPE AND DUCT OPENINGS AND EQUIPMENT RECESSES

A. Pipe and duct chases, openings, and equipment recesses shall be provided by others only if shown on architectural or structural drawings. All openings for the mechanical work, except where plans and specifications indicate otherwise, shall be provided as work of this Division. Include openings information with coordination drawings.

B. Whether chases, recesses, and openings are provided as work of this Division or by others, this Contractor shall supervise their construction and be responsible for the correct size and location even though detailed and dimensioned on the drawings. This Contractor shall pay for all necessary cutting, repairing, and finishing if any are left out or incorrectly made. All necessary openings thru existing walls, ceilings, floors, roofs, etc. shall be provided by this Contractor unless indicated otherwise by the drawing and/or specifications.

1.15 UNFIT OR DAMAGED WORK

A. Any part of this installation that fails, is unfit, or becomes damaged during construction, shall be replaced or otherwise made good. The cost of such remedy shall be the responsibility of this Division.

1.16 WORKMANSHIP

A. Workmanship shall be the best quality of its kind for the respective industries, trades, crafts, and practices, and shall be acceptable in every respect to the Owner's representative. Nothing contained herein shall relieve the Contractor from making good and perfect work in all details in construction.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 9

1.17 SAFETY REGULATION

A. The Contractor shall comply with all local, Federal, and OSHA safety requirements in performance with this work. (See General Conditions). This Contractor shall be required to provide equipment, supervision, construction, procedures, and all other necessary items to assure safety to life and property.

1.18 ELECTRICAL SERVICES

A. All equipment control wiring and all automatic temperature control wiring including all necessary contacts, relays, and interlocks, whether low or line voltage, except power wiring, shall be furnished and installed as work of this Division unless shown to be furnished by Division 26. All such wiring shall be in conduit as required by electrical codes. Wiring in the mechanical rooms, fans rooms and inaccessible ceilings and walls shall be installed in conduit as well. Installation of any and all wiring done under Division 21, 22 and 23 shall be in accordance with the requirements of Division 26, Electrical.

B. All equipment that requires an electrical connection shall be furnished so that it will operate properly and deliver full capacity on the electrical service available.

C. Refer to the electrical control equipment and wiring shown on the diagrams. Any changes or additions required by specific equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the equipment.

D. The Mechanical Contractor must coordinate with the Electrical Contractor to insure that all required components of control work are included and fully understood. No additional cost shall accrue to the Owner as a result of lack of such coordination.

1.19 WORK, MATERIALS, AND QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and of the best quality of their respective kinds and all labor shall be done in a most thorough and workmanlike manner.

B. Products or equipment of any of the manufacturers cited herein or any of the products approved by the Addenda may be used. However, where lists of products are cited herein, the one first listed in the design equipment used in drawings and schedules to establish size, quality, function, and capacity standards. If other than design equipment is used, it shall be carefully checked for access to equipment, electrical and control requirements, valving, and piping. Should changes or additions occur in piping, valving, electrical work, etc., or if the work of other Contractors would be revised by the alternate equipment, the cost of all changes shall be borne as work of this Division.

C. The Execution portions of the specifications specify what products and materials may be used. Any products listed in the Product section of the specification that are not listed in the Execution portion of the specification may not be used without written approval by the Engineer.

D. The access to equipment shown on the drawings is the minimum acceptable space requirements. No equipment that reduces or restricts accessibility to this or any other equipment will be considered.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 10

E. All major items of equipment are specified in the equipment schedules on the drawings or in these specifications and shall be furnished complete with all accessories normally supplied with the catalog item listed and all other accessories necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation.

F. All welders shall be certified in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, latest Edition.

1.20 PROTECTION AGAINST WEATHER AND STORING OF MATERIALS

A. All equipment and materials shall be properly stored and protected against moisture, dust, and wind. Coverings or other protection shall be used on all items that may be damaged or rusted or may have performance impaired by adverse weather or moisture conditions. Damage or defect developing before acceptance of the work shall be made good at the Contractor's expense.

B. All open duct and pipe openings shall be adequately covered at all times.

1.21 INSTALLATION CHECK

A. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer or supplier of each item of equipment indicated in the equipment schedule and the seismic supplier shall visit the site of the work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the equipment supplier's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation. The equipment supplier's representative shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation is satisfactory to the Engineer.

B. Each equipment supplier's representative shall furnish to the Owner, through the Engineer, a written report certifying that the equipment (1) has been properly installed and lubricated; (2) is in accurate alignment; (3) is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and, (4) has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily.

C. All costs for this work shall be included in the prices quoted by equipment suppliers.

1.22 EQUIPMENT LUBRICATION

A. The Contractor shall properly lubricate all pieces of equipment before turning the building over to the Owner. A linen tag shall be attached to each piece of equipment, showing the date of lubrication and the lubricant used. No equipment shall be started until it is properly lubricated.

B. Necessary time shall be spent with the Owner's Representative to thoroughly familiarize him with all necessary lubrications and maintenance that will be required of him.

C. Detergent oil as used for automotive purposes shall not be used for this work.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 11

1.23 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. No cutting or drilling in structural members shall be done without written approval of the Architect. The work shall be carefully laid out in advance, and cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, or other surfaces necessary for the mechanical work shall be carefully done. Any damage to building, piping, or equipment shall be repaired by professional plasterers, masons, concrete workers, etc., and all such work shall be paid for as work of this Division.

B. When concrete, grading, etc., is disturbed, it shall be restored to original condition as described in the applicable Division of this Specification.

1.24 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. All necessary excavations and backfilling for the Mechanical phase of this project shall be provided as work of this Division. Trenches for all underground pipelines shall be excavated to the required depths. The bottom of trenches shall be compacted hard and graded to obtain required fall. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers, not exceeding 12 inches in thickness, and properly moistened. Each layer shall be compacted, by suitable equipment, to a density of not less than 95 percent as determined by ASTM D-1557. After pipelines have been tested, inspected, and approved, the trench shall be backfilled with selected material. Excess earth shall be hauled from the job site. Fill materials approved by the Architect shall be provided as work of this Division.

B. No trenches shall be cut near or under any footings without consultation first with the Architect's office. Any trenches or excavations more than 30 inches deep shall be tapered, shored, covered, or otherwise made absolutely safe so that no vehicle or persons can be injured by falling into such excavations, or in any way be harmed by cave-ins, shifting earth, rolling rocks, or by drowning. This protection shall be extended to all persons approaching excavation related to this work whether or not such persons are authorized to be in the vicinity of the construction.

1.25 ACCESS

A. Provide access doors in walls, ceilings and floors by this division unless otherwise noted. For access to mechanical equipment such as valves, dampers, VAV boxes, fans, controls, etc. Refer to Division 8 for door specifications. All access doors shall be 24" x 24" unless otherwise indicated or required. Coordinate location of doors with the Architect prior to installation. . If doors are not specified in Division 8, provide the following: Doors in ceilings and wall shall be equal to JR Smith No. 4760 bonderized and painted. Doors in tile walls shall be equal to JR Smith No. 4730 chrome plated. Doors in floors shall be equal to JR Smith No. 4910

B. Valves: Valve must be installed in locations where access is readily available. If access is compromised, as judged by the Mechanical Engineer, these valves shall be relocated where directed at the Contractors expense.

C. Equipment: Equipment must be installed in locations and orientations so that access to all components requiring service or maintenance will not be compromised. If access is compromised, as judged by the Mechanical Engineer, the contractor shall modify the installation as directed by the Engineer at the Contractors expense.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 12

D. It is the responsibility of this division to install terminal boxes, valves and all other equipment and devices so they can be accessed. If any equipment or devices are installed so they cannot be accessed on a ladder a catwalk and ladder system shall be installed above the ceiling to access and service this equipment.

1.26 CONCRETE BASES AND INSERTS

A. Bases: The concrete bases shall be provided and installed as work by this divsion. This Division shall be responsible for the proper size and location of bases and shall furnish all required anchor bolts and sleeves with templates to be installed as work of Division 3, Concrete.

B. All floor-mounted mechanical equipment shall be set on 6-inch high concrete bases, unless otherwise noted or shown on drawings. Such bases shall extend 6 inches beyond equipment or mounting rails on all sides or as shown on the drawings and shall have a 1-inch beveled edge all around.

C. Inserts: Where slotted or other types of inserts required for this work are to be cast into concrete, they shall be furnished as work of this Division

D. Concrete inserts and pipe support systems shall be equal to Unistrut P3200 series for all piping where more than one pipe is suspended at a common location. Spacing of the inserts shall match the size and type of pipe and of ductwork being supported. The Unistrut insert and pipe support system shall include all inserts, vertical supports, horizontal support members, clamps, hangers, rollers, bolts, nuts, and any other accessory items for a complete pipe-supporting system.

1.27 CLEANING AND PAINTING

A. Cleaning: After all tests and adjustments have been made and all systems pronounced satisfactory for permanent operation, this Contractor shall clean all exposed piping, ductwork, insulated members, fixture, and equipment installed under this Section and leave them ready for painting. He shall refinish any damaged finish and leave everything in proper working order. The Contractor shall remove all stains or grease marks on walls, floors, glass, hardware, fixtures, or elsewhere, caused by his workman or for which he is responsible. He shall remove all stickers on plumbing fixtures, do all required patching up and repair all work of others damaged by this division of the work, and leave the premises in a clean and orderly condition.

B. Painting: Painting of exposed pipe, insulated pipe, ducts, or equipment is work of Division 9, Painting.

C. Mechanical Contractor: All equipment which is to be furnished in factory prefinished conditions by the mechanical Contractor shall be left without mark, scratch, or impairment to finish upon completion of job. Any necessary refinishing to match original shall be done. Do not paint over nameplates, serial numbers, or other identifying marks.

D. Removal of Debris, Etc: Upon completion of this division of the work, remove all surplus material and rubbish resulting from this work, and leave the premises in a clean and orderly condition.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 13

1.28 CONTRACT COMPLETION

A. Incomplete and Unacceptable Work: If additional site visits or design work is required by the Engineer or Architect because of the use of incomplete or unacceptable work by the Contractor, then the Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer and Architect for all additional time and expenses involved.

B. Maintenance Instructions: The Contractor shall furnish the Owner complete printed and illustrated operating and maintenance instructions covering all units of mechanical equipment, together with parts lists.

C. Instructions To Owner's Representatives: In addition to any detailed instructions called for, the mechanical Contractor must provide, without expense to the Owner, competent instructors to train the Owner's representatives who will be in charge of the apparatus and equipment, in the care, adjustment, and operation of all parts on the heating, air conditioning, ventilating, plumbing, fire protection, and automatic temperature control equipment. Instruction dates shall be scheduled at time of final inspection. A written report specifying times, dates, and name of personnel instructed shall be forwarded to the Architect. A minimum of four 8-hour instruction periods shall be provided. The instruction periods will be broken down to shorter periods when requested by the Owner. The total instruction hours shall not reduced. The ATC Contractor shall provide 4 hours of instructions. The remaining hours shall be divided between the mechanical and sheet metal Contractor.

D. Guarantee: By the acceptance of any contract award for the work herein described or shown on the drawings, the Contractor assumes the full responsibility imposed by the guarantee as set forth herein and in the General Conditions, and should protect himself through proper guarantees from equipment and special equipment Contractors and from subcontractors as their interests may appear.

E. The guarantee so assumed by the Contractor and as work of this Section is as follows:1. That the entire mechanical system, including plumbing, heating, and air-conditioning

system shall be quiet in operation.2. That the circulation of water shall be complete and even.3. That all pipes, conduit, and connections shall be perfectly free from foreign matter and

pockets and that all other obstructions to the free passage of air, water, liquid, sewage, and vent shall be removed.

4. That he shall make promptly and free of charge, upon notice from the Owner, any necessary repairs due to defective workmanship or materials that may occur during a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion.

5. That all specialties, mechanical, and patent devices incorporated in these systems shall be adjusted in a manner that each shall develop its maximum efficiency in the operation of the system; i.e., diffusers shall deliver the designed amount of air shown on drawings, thermostats shall operate to the specified limits, etc.

6. All equipment and the complete mechanical, ductwork, piping and plumbing systems shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion, this includes all mechanical, ductwork, piping and plumbing equipment and products and is not limited to boiler, chillers, coils, fans, filters etc. Any equipment supplier not willing to comply with this guarantee period shall not submit a bid price for this project. The Contractor shall be responsible for a 100-percent guarantee for the system and all items of equipment for this period. If the contractor needs to provide temporary heating or cooling to the building and or needs to insure systems are installed

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 14

properly and or to meet the project schedule the guaranteed of all systems and equipment shall be as indicated above, on year from the date of the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion.

7. All filters used during construction shall be replaced just before equipment is turned over to the Owner, and all required equipment and parts shall be oiled. Any worn parts shall also be replaced.

8. If any systems or equipment is used for temporary heating or cooling the systems shall be protected so they remain clean. I.e. if the ductwork systems are used temporary filters and a filter holder (not duct-taped to ducts or grilles) shall be installed to insure the systems and the equipment remain clean.

1.29 CURBS

A. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or on the documents all roof curbs for all equipment are to be provided by Division 22 and 23.

1.30 TEST RUN

A. The Mechanical Contractor shall operate the mechanical system for a minimum of 30 days to prove the operation of the system.

1.31 EQUIPMENT STARTUP AND CHECKOUT:

A. Each major piece of equipment shall be started and checked out by an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer. A certificate indicating the equipment is operating to the satisfaction of the manufacturer shall be provided and shall be included in the commissioning report.

B. This contractor shall coordinate commissioning procedures and activities with the commissioning agent.

1.32 DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

B. Proceed with demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

C. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 15

D. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

E. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

F. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

G. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.

H. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

I. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

J. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

K. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

L. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations.

M. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

N. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.

O. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

P. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.

END OF SECTION 23 0100

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 230100 - 16

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TEMPORARY USE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

230150 - 1

SECTION 230150 – TEMPORARY USE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes requirements for temporary us of equipment and systems and any other items that are used during the construction of the project.

1.2 EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEMS NEEDED TO OPERATE BEFORE CONTRACT COMPLETION

A. If the contractor needs to provide temporary heating or cooling to the building and or needs to insure systems are installed properly for start up and or to meet the project schedule the guaranteed of all systems and equipment shall be for one year from the date of the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion.

All equipment and the complete mechanical, ductwork, piping and plumbing systems shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion, this includes all mechanical, ductwork, piping and plumbing equipment and products and is not limited to boiler, chillers, coils, fans, filters etc. Any contractor or equipment supplier who is not willing to comply with this guarantee period shall not submit a bid price for this project. The Contractor shall be responsible for a 100-percent guarantee for the systems and all items of equipment for this period.

All filters used during construction shall be replaced just before equipment is turned over to the Owner, and all required equipment and parts shall be oiled. Any worn parts shall also be replaced.

If any systems or equipment is used for temporary heating or cooling the systems shall be protected so they remain clean. I.e. if the ductwork systems are used temporary filters and a filter holder (not duct-taped to ducts or grilles) shall be installed to insure the systems and the equipment remain clean. All return air openings shall be protected with a metal filter frame and filters.

1.3 TEMPORARY EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM SUBMITTALS

A. If it is determined by the project or contractor that equipment or systems are needed to operate to provide heating, cooling or other needed services this division shall submit a document indicating what measures will be taken to insure the safe and proper operation of the equipment, systems and personal associated with the operation, this document shall be submitted to the engineer for approval. This plan shall show connections of equipment, utility hookups (if required) staging areas etc.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TEMPORARY USE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

230150 - 2

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

D. SMACNA: The latest standard from SSMACNA shall apply.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of equipment or systems: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use until the facility has been accepted by the owner regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters and cooling units if required with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filters with MERV of 8 at each return air opening in system and remove at end of construction. These filters are to be installed in a filter housing frame and are not to be duct taped. Clean HVAC system as required in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate equipment where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify equipment and systems as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate equipment to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TEMPORARY USE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

230150 - 3

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.

C. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

D. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

3.3 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Maintenance: Maintain equipment and systems in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar equipment and systems on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

B. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility or equipment when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials equipment that constitute temporary equipment are property of Contractor. 2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent equipment and

systems used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

3.4 EQUIPMENT STARTUP AND CHECKOUT:

A. Each major piece of equipment shall be started and checked out by an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer at substantial completion. A certificate indicating the equipment is operating to the satisfaction of the manufacturer shall be provided and shall be included in the commissioning report.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TEMPORARY USE OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

230150 - 4

END OF SECTION 230150

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 1

SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Transition fittings.2. Sleeves.3. Escutcheons.4. Grout.5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.6. Painting and finishing.7. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, and crawlspaces.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces, mechanical equipment rooms, accessible pipe shafts, accessible plumbing chases, and accessible tunnels.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.2. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Transition fittings.2. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 3

2.2 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 4

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.2 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.3 PAINTING

A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.4 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

END OF SECTION 230500

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Balancing Air Systems:a. Dual-duct systems.

2. Existing Systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

Qualification Data: Within the following number of days of the Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article;

1. 30 days.

B. Certified TAB reports.

C. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.2. Serial number.3. Application.4. Dates of use.5. Dates of calibration.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB and shall be the same as the TAB Contractor.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician and shall be the same as the TAB Contractor.

B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by: 1. Architect .

D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on the following distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed:

1. Air .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TAB SPECIALISTS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, engage one of the following:

1. Bonneville Test and Balance2. BTC Service.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 3

3. Certified Test & Balance.4. Diamond Test & Balance.5. RS Analysis.6. Test & Balance Inc.7. Payson Sheetmetal.8. QT&B Inc.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine: 1. Ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to

verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in: a. Section 233113 "Metal Ducts"

2. Verify ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return or relief air are properly separated from adjacent areas.

3. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as dual duct boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 4

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.5. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided.6. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can

be met.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in this section and:

1. AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance"

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation," Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) .

3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

C. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

D. Check for airflow blockages.

E. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 5

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR DUAL-DUCT SYSTEMS

A. Verify that the cooling coil is capable of full-system airflow, and set mixing boxes at full-cold airflow position for fan volume.

B. Measure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate controls of mixing boxes and to overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing boxes.

1. If insufficient static pressure exists, increase airflow at the fan.

C. Test and adjust the constant-volume mixing boxes as follows:

1. Verify both hot and cold operations by adjusting the thermostat and observing changes in air temperature and volume.

2. Verify sufficient inlet static pressure before making volume adjustments.3. Adjust mixing boxes to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. Measure airflow

by Pitot-tube traverse readings or by measuring static pressure at mixing-box taps if provided by mixing-box manufacturer.

D. Do not overpressurize ducts.

E. Remeasure static pressure in both hot and cold ducts at the end of the longest duct run to determine that sufficient static pressure exists to operate controls of mixing boxes and to overcome resistance in the ducts and outlets downstream from mixing boxes.

F. Adjust variable-air-volume, dual-duct systems in the same way as constant-volume, dual-duct systems; adjust maximum- and minimum-airflow setting of each mixing box.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.2. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.3. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the

measurements taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following:

1. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.2. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 6

3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Balance each air outlet.

3.8 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent .

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent .

3.9 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare progress reports on the following interval to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors;

1. Weekly.

3.10 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:1. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.2. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings

and product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.3. Project name.4. Project location.5. Architect's name and address.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 7

6. Engineer's name and address.7. Contractor's name and address.8. Report date.9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.b. Notable characteristics of systems.c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated

values.15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.b. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.b. Location and zone.c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.e. Duct size in inches.f. Duct area in sq. ft..g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm.h. Indicated velocity in fpm.i. Actual air flow rate in cfm.j. Actual average velocity in fpm.k. Barometric pressure in psig.

E. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.b. Location and zone.c. Apparatus used for test.d. Area served.e. Make.f. Number from system diagram.g. Type and model number.h. Size.i. Effective area in sq. ft..

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 8

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Air flow rate in cfm.b. Air velocity in fpm.c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm.d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.e. Final air flow rate in cfm.f. Final velocity in fpm.g. Space temperature in deg F.

F. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.b. Serial number.c. Application.d. Dates of use.e. Dates of calibration.

3.11 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.b. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point.c. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.d. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by:

a. Architect .2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the

presence of:a. Architect .

3. The following entity shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day:

a. Architect .

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 9

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails, proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.12 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

END OF SECTION 230593

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 10

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON DUCT REQUIREMENTS 233001 - 1

SECTION 233001 - COMMON DUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - PRODUCTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Includes But Not Limited To:

1. General procedures and requirements for ductwork.2. Repair leaks in ductwork, as identified by smoke test, at no additional cost to Owner.3. Soundproofing procedures for duct penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors in

mechanical equipment rooms.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 07: Quality of Acoustic Sealant.2. Section 23 0500: Common Work Results for HVAC3. Section 23 0593: Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Sealer and gauze proposed for sealing ductwork.

B. Quality Assurance / Control:

1. Manufacturer’s installation manuals providing detailed instructions on assembly, joint sealing, and system pressure testing for leaks.

2. Specification data on sealer and gauze proposed for sealing ductwork.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Requirements: Construction details not specifically called out in Contract Documents shall conform to applicable requirements of SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

B. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule conference immediately before installation of ductwork.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON DUCT REQUIREMENTS 233001 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Finishes, Where Applicable: Colors as selected by Architect.

2.2 Duct Hangers:

A. One inch by 18 ga galvanized steel straps or steel rods as shown on Drawings, and spaced not more than 96 inches apart. Do not use wire hangers.

1. Attaching screws at trusses shall be 2 inch No. 10 round head wood screws. Nails not allowed.

2. Attach threaded rod to steel joist with Grinnell Steel washer plate Fig. 60 - ph-1. Double nut connection.

2.3 Penetration Soundproofing Materials:

A. Insulation for Packing: Fiberglass.

B. Calking: Polysulphide.

C. Escutcheon Frame: 22 ga galvanized iron 2 inches wide.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. During installation, protect open ends of ducts by covering with plastic sheet tied in place to prevent entrance of debris and dirt.

B. Make necessary allowances and provisions in installation of sheet metal ducts for structural conditions of building. Revisions in layout and configuration may be allowed, with prior written approval of Architect. Maintain required airflows in suggesting revisions.

C. Hangers And Supports:

1. Install pair of hangers close to each transverse joint and elsewhere as required by spacing indicated in table on Drawings.

2. Install upper ends of hanger securely to floor or roof construction above by method shown on Drawings.

3. Attach strap hangers to ducts with cadmium-plated screws. Use of pop rivets or other means will not be accepted.

4. Where hangers are secured to forms before concrete slabs are poured, cut off flush all nails, strap ends, and other projections after forms are removed.

5. Secure vertical ducts passing through floors by extending bracing angles to rest firmly on floors without loose blocking or shimming. Support vertical ducts, which do not pass through floors, by using bands bolted to walls, columns, etc. Size, spacing, and method of attachment to vertical ducts shall be same as specified for hanger bands on horizontal ducts.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON DUCT REQUIREMENTS 233001 - 3

D. Penetration Soundproofing

1. Pack space between ducts and structure full of fiberglass insulation of sufficient thickness to be wedged tight, allowing space for application of calking.

2. Provide calking at least 2 inches thick between duct and structure on both ends of opening through structure.

3. Provide metal escutcheon on Equipment Room side. Secure escutcheon to wall.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of duct systems before final completion.

END OF SECTION 233001

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

COMMON DUCT REQUIREMENTS 233001 - 4

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.3. Sheet metal materials.4. Duct liner.5. Sealants and gaskets.6. Hangers and supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

3. Section 230713 “Duct Insulation” for duct insulation and fire wrap.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.2. Sealants and gaskets.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 2

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.4. Elevation of top of ducts.5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.6. Fittings.7. Reinforcement and spacing.8. Seam and joint construction.9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors

and panels.12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and

vibration isolation.13. Duct fabrication shall not begin until shop drawings have been submitted and reviewed

by the mechanical engineer.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses.2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.3. Reinforcement details and spacing.4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.5. Design Calculations: Calculations for selecting hangers and supports.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components.3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including, but not limited to the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.b. Air outlets and inlets.c. Speakers.d. Sprinklers.e. Access panels.f. Perimeter moldings.

B. Field quality-control reports.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 3

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to [AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.] [AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.] [AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.]

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Duct dimensions shown on drawings are inside clear dimensions.

E. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 4

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Duct dimensions shown on drawings are inside clear dimensions.

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

D. Longitudinal Seams: Not allowed.

E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 5

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.b. Johns Manville.c. Knauf Insulation.d. Owens Corning.

2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:

a. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. b. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.

3. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

4. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: a. Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. b. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.b. Armacell LLC.c. Rubatex International, LLC

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

3. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, , length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

a. 0.135-inch-diameter shank.2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: With beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation

securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick aluminum.

D. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 6

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-

edge overlapping.5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of

ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.

6. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inchestransversely; at 3 inchesfrom transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 incheslongitudinally.

7. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges.b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.

8. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.

a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.

9. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated build-outs (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 4 inches.3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 7

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum.

10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin.3. Solvent: Toluene and heptane.4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent.5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60.6. Water resistant.7. Mold and mildew resistant.8. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).9. VOC: Maximum 395 g/L.10. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.11. Service: Indoor or outdoor.12. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),

stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

E. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.2. Type: S.3. Grade: NS.4. Class: 25.5. Use: O.6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

G. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 8

3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 9

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 2 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines" .

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 10

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class A.

3. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class A.

4. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely

cured.3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inchesthick.4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or

for slabs less than 4 inchesthick.5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with the requirements specified in Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

1. Comply with ASCE/SEI 7.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 11

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Paint exterior of metal ducts that are exposed. Apply latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." Color by architect.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test.

2. Test the following systems:a. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative

duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

b. Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections, selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or

section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

2. Any liner showing evidence that is has wet at any time shall be removed and replaced with new liner.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 12

a. Disinfect affected sheet metal, and pins.b. Install new liner per specificationsc. Seal friable edges and seams of repaired liner.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 DUCT CLEANINGA. Clean new and existing duct systems before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 13

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus

is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.10 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.11 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel.

B. Ductwork running in areas where there are no ceilings or when noted on the drawings shall be lined duct and shall meet the requirements indicated below.

C. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 16.

e. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 8.

D. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.

c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 16.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 8.

2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 14

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.

c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 16. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 8

E. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.

2. PVC-Coated Ducts:

a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

3. Stainless-Steel Ducts:

a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

4. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum.

F. Duct Liner Restrictions:

1. Duct Liner exposed to air movement shall not be used on medium pressure ductwork (2000 to 4000 FPM velocity). See section 230713 “Duct Insulation” for insulation requirements.

2. Duct Liner exposed to air movement shall not be used on high pressure ductwork (Greater than 4000 FPM velocity). See section 230713 “Duct Insulation” for insulation requirements.

3. All duct liner shall meet all of the requirements found in 2018 IECC

G. Liner: (Ductwork located Interior to building Insulated Envelope)

1. Low Pressure Supply Air Ducts (Less than 2000 FPM velocity): Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick with a minimum R value of 4.0 for ducts in unconditioned spaces.

2. Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I [or flexible elastomeric] [Natural fiber], 1 inch thick for ducts in conditioned spaces.

3. Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick with a minimum R value of 4.0 for ducts in unconditioned spaces.

H. Double-Wall Duct Interstitial Insulation:

1. Supply Air Ducts: 1-1/2 inch thick with a minimum R value of 6.0.

2. Return Air Ducts: 1-1/2 inch thick with a minimum R value of 6.0.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 15

I. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Welded.

J. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry high efficiency take-off.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: 45-degree entry high efficiency take-off.

2. Round:

a. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 45-degree entry high efficiency tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.

END OF SECTION 233113

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 16

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Manual volume dampers.2. Control dampers.3. Duct silencers.4. Turning vanes.5. Remote damper operators.6. Duct-mounted access doors.7. Flexible connectors.8. Flexible ducts.9. Duct accessory hardware.10. High efficiency take-offs.

B. Related Requirements:1. Division 23 “Diffusers, Registers and Grilles”.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.

B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings.b. Manual volume damper installations.c. Control-damper installations.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 2

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.

B. Source quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION

A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653.1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

B. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

C. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 3

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.b. McGill AirFlow LLC.c. Nailor Industries Inc.d. Pottorff.e. Ruskin Company.f. United Enertech

2. Standard leakage rating , with linkage outside airstream .3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

4. Frames: Hat-shaped, Mitered and welded corners. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.a. 16GA 0.064-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel.

5. Blades:a. Multiple or single blade. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. Stiffened damper

blades for stability.b. Material:

1) Galvanized -steel, 16GA 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: a. Nonferrous metal b. Shall extend full length of damper blades in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch

wg or more.

7. Bearings:a. Material:

1) Molded synthetic. b. Bearings at both ends of damper operating shafts in ducts with pressure classes of

3-inch wg or more.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

B. Low-Leakage, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.b. McGill AirFlow LLC.c. Nailor Industries Inc.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 4

d. Pottorff.e. Ruskin Company.f. United Enertech

2. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.3. Low-leakage rating , with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified

Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.4. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.5. Frames:

a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 1) 16GA 0.064-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel.

b. Mitered and welded corners.c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

6. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.d. Material:

1) Galvanized, roll-formed steel, 16GA 0.064 inch thick.

7. Blade Axles: a. Nonferrous metal.

8. Bearings:

a. Molded synthetic.b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or more shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.9. Blade Seals:

a. Neoprene. 10. Jamb Seals: Cambered Stainless steel or aluminum.11. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel or aluminum. 12. Accessories:

a. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration.

C. Jackshaft:

1. Size: a. 0.5-inch. b. 1-inch diameter.

2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.

3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly.

D. Damper Hardware:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 5

1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.

2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Greenheck Fan Corporation.2. Pottorff.3. Ruskin Company.4. Young Regulator Company.5. United Enertech

B. Low-leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

C. Frames:

1. Section: a. Hat shaped.

2. Material: a. 20 GA 0.40-inch- thick galvanized steel .

3. Corners:a. Mitered-and-welded.

D. Blades: Multiple.

1. Maximum blade width:a. 6 inches.

2. Opposed -blade design.3. Material:

a. Galvanized-steel.4. Thickness:

a. 20 GA 0.40-inch- thick galvanized steel 5. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

a. Closed-cell neoprene

E. Blade Axles:

1. Section: a. 3/8-inch-square

2. Material:a. Galvanized steel.

3. Blade-linkage hardware: a. Zinc-plated steel and brass.b. Ends sealed against blade bearings:

4. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 6

F. Bearings:

1. Type: a. Molded synthetic.

2. Axles: Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or more shall have axles full length of damper blades.

3. Bearings: Thrust bearings at each end of every blade. Bearings at both ends of each operating shaft.

2.5 DUCT SILENCERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Industrial Acoustics Company.2. Ruskin Company.3. SEMCO Incorporated.4. Vibro-Acoustics.5. E.H. Price

B. General Requirements:

1. Factory fabricated.2. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and

accessory materials shall have flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not exceeding 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

3. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

C. Shape:

1. Rectangular straight with splitters or baffles.2. Round straight with center bodies or pods.3. Rectangular elbow with splitters or baffles.4. Round elbow with center bodies or pods.5. Rectangular transitional with splitters or baffles.

D. Rectangular Silencer Outer Casing: Galvanized sheet steel.1. ASTM A 653:

E. Inner Casing and Baffles: Galvanized sheet metal.

F. Connection Sizes: Match connecting ductwork unless otherwise indicated.

G. Principal Sound-Absorbing Mechanism:

1. Controlled impedance membranes and broadly tuned resonators without absorptive media.

2. Dissipative or Film-lined type with fill material:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 7

a. Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not less than 15 percent compression

b. Erosion Barrier: Polymer bag enclosing fill, and heat sealed before assembly.c. Prohibited: Mineral wool will not be permitted as a substitute for glass fiber.

3. Lining: a. Material:

1) Tedlar 2) Fiberglas cloth.

b. Prohibited: Mesh, screen or corrugated perforated liner will not be acceptable as a substitute for the specified spacer.

H. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to system pressure variations. Do not use mechanical fasteners for unit assemblies.

1. Joints: a. Lock formed and sealed.

2. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion.

3. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.4. Structural Criteria: The silencers shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential

air pressure of 8 inches water gage.5. Spot Welds: All spot welds shall be painted.

I. Accessories:1. Factory-installed end caps to prevent contamination during shipping.2. Removable splitters.

2.6 TURNING VANES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. METALAIRE, Inc.2. SEMCO Incorporated.3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Fabricate single blade vanes to comply with SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible.”

2. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 8

D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

E. Vane Construction: 1. Single wall

F. Vane Spacing:1. 1-1/2” spacing between turning vanes2. 3-1/4” spacing not allowed.

G. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 36 inches wide and additional bracing for larger dimensions.

2.7 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Pottorff.2. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.3. Young Regulator Company.

B. Cable Type:1. Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment.2. Tubing/Sheathing: Galvinsed, Brass, Copper or Aluminum.3. Cable: Stainless steel or Steel.4. Wall-Box Mounting: Coordinate with Architect.5. Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: Coordinate with Architect.

C. Activated Electric Type:1. Description: Electrically activated zone control damper for remote adjustment. When an

adjustment is needed the system is powered up.2. Means: Factory mounted actuator factory wired to damper. 3. Portable 9 volt system. No field power requirement.4. Mounting: Recessed Wall Box or Diffuser or Hand Held.5. Wall-Box Cover Finish: Coordinate with Architect.6. Wall-Box Porting: 1 to 6 ports or more.

2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Ventfabrics, Inc.3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 9

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a wide fabric strip attached to two narrower metal strips. Provide strips of metal compatible with connected ducts.1. Wide Strip:

a. 3-1/2 inches.2. Narrow Strips:

a. 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.2. McGill AirFlow LLC.3. Themaflex4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Ducts shall conform to the requirements for Class I connectors when tested inaccordance with "Standard for Factory Made Air Ducts Materials and Air Duct Connectors" (UL 181).

C. Ducts shall also pass the 15 minute U.L. flame penetration test as specified in the UL 181 Standard.

D. Insulated, Flexible Duct: Two-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor-barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F.4. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

E. Flexible Duct Connectors:

1. Clamps: in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. a. Material: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band

with a worm-gear action.

2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 10

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

C. Splitter Damper Accessories: Zinc-plated damper blade bracket; 1/4-inch, zinc-plated operating rod; and a duct-mounted, ball-joint bracket with flat rubber gasket and square-head set screw.

D. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 to 18 inches to suit duct size.

2.11 HIGH EFFICIENCY TAKE-OFFS

A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following.

1. Air-Rite2. Hercules Industries3. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.4. Spiral Manufacturing Co. Inc.5. Ferguson

B. Materials:

1. 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal meeting ASTM A653 and A924

C. Take-off shall meet SMACNA third edition Section 4.8 figure 4.6 - 45 degree entry.

D.Rectangular opening with flanged sides on all sides. Complete with closed cell neoprene gasket to provide a tight seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

General

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Use the Remote Damper Operator when they are called out on the drawings or when the damper cannot be easily accessed.

D. Install high efficiency take-off on all branch duct take-offs. Provide take-off with balancing damper as shown on drawings. Spin-in fittings are not allowed.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 11

Flexible Ducts / Flexible Duct Connectors

E. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

F. Flexible duct connections from the main trunk ducts to diffuser boots shall be furnished and installed as shown on the drawings. Flexible ductwork shall only be used as indicated on the drawings.

G. Where flexible duct is indicated, use insulated flexible duct for supply air return and exhaust air.

H. Flexible ductwork shall be run in straight lengths.

I. Provide support in flexible duct every three feet.

J. Flexible ducts shall have compression fittings on both ends.

K. Flexible ductwork is not allowed to bend 90 degrees. If a bend is needed use sheet-metal hard elbows. Hard turns, offsets, or kinks will not be allowed.

L. Flexible ducts shall connect to trunk duct with high efficiency takeoffs.

M. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

N. Connect terminal units to supply ducts:1. With maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct.

O. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

P. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts:1. With maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

Volume Damper

Q. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

R. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. Exception: Pressure relief damper.

S. A balance damper with locking quadrant will be provided downstream of take-off from trunk duct.

Sizes in "Access Door Sizes" Paragraph below are from one manufacturer's literature. SMACNA lists only three sizes, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm), 16 by 20 inches (400 by 500 mm), and 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm), but makes no recommendations for applications. Indicate location and type of each access door on Drawings.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 12

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.4. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

END OF SECTION 233300

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1

SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.

B. Related Sections:1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control

dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.2. Section 230594 "General Testing, Adjusting and Balancing" for balancing diffusers,

registers, and grilles.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.5. Duct access panels.

B. Source quality-control reports.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Product Options: Drawings and schedules indicate specific requirements of diffusers, registers, and grilles and are based on the specific requirements of the systems indicated.

B. NFPA Compliance: Install diffusers, registers, and grilles according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Air Factors2. Carnes.3. Kruegar.4. METALAIRE, Inc.5. Nailor Industries Inc.6. Price Industries.7. Titus.8. Tuttle & Bailey.9. Air Concepts.10. Trox.

2.2 REGISTERS, GRILLES, & DIFFUSERS

A. General: The frames for all registers, grilles, and diffusers shall match type of ceiling where they are to be installed. Special frames shall be provided for narrow T-bar ceilings. Refer to reflected ceiling plan and other specification divisions for ceiling type. See drawings AND schedules for additional information.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, coordination drawings, original design, and referenced standards.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After installation of diffusers, registers, and grilles, inspect exposed finish. Clean exposed surfaces to remove burrs, dirt, and smudges. Replace diffusers, registers, and grilles that have damaged finishes.

END OF SECTION 233713

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEYARCHITECTURE

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 4

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTICAL 26 0500 - 1ARCHITECTURE

SECTION 26 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTSFOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation.2. Sleeves for raceways and cables.3. Sleeve seals.4. Raceways.5. Grout.6. Common electrical installation requirements.7. Concrete equipment bases.8. Building wire and connectors.9. Supporting devices for electrical components.10. Electrical identification.11. Electricity-metering components.12. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.13. Touchup painting.14. Workmanship.15. Coordination drawings.16. Rough-ins.17. Electrical installations.18. Cutting and patching.19. Submittals.20. Record documents.21. Maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

D. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration.

E. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.

F. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTICAL 26 0500 - 2ARCHITECTURE

G. KW: Kilowatts.

H. NECA: National Electrical Contractor Association

I. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

J. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

K. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

L. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

M. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope.4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.5. Clearance for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required

for periodic maintenance.6. Fire rated wall and floor penetrations.7. Equipment connections and support details.8. Sizes and location of required concrete pad and bases.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTICAL 26 0500 - 3ARCHITECTURE

E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

F. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling installation.

G. Verify voltage, phase and amps of all equipment, prior to rough-in phase of project.

H. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

I. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping".

J. Indicate the proposed locations of the major raceway systems, equipment and materials. Including the following:1. Clearance for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required

for periodic maintenance.2. Fire rated wall and floor penetrations.3. Equipment connections and support details.

1.6 WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer to conform to the contract documents. The installation shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in the type of work involved.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall have a licensed or certified Master Electrician assigned to direct the electrical work and to coordinate work with the General Contractor and other trades. Furthermore, a licensed or certified journeyman electrician shall be assigned to supervise the actual performance of all electrical work under Division 26. All installers must be certified journeyman.

1. All workmen doing electrical work of any nature must at all times carry their electrician's license with them and show it upon request.

2. The licensed or certified journeyman assigned to supervise the performance of Division 26 electrical work, shall be required to be on the job site at all times, while Division 26 work is being performed.

C. The installation shall conform to the applicable rules of the National Electrical Code and National Electrical Safety Code except where more stringent requirements are noted in these specifications. Conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.

D. The Contractor and Sub-contractors shall comply with OSHA and EPA Standards while in the performance of this contract.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The equipment specified carries brand names and catalog numbers and shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality. Use only specified items or those listed by addenda.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTICAL 26 0500 - 4ARCHITECTURE

B. Any conflict arising from the use of substituted equipment shall be the responsibility of the supplier, who shall bear all costs required to make the equipment comply with the intent of the plans and specifications.

C. At the option of the Architect/Engineer, samples may be required for non-standard items before installation during construction.

D. No materials or apparatus shall be substituted after the bid opening except where the equipment manufacturer has been discontinued or delivery becomes a problem, then written approval of the Architect/Engineer is required.

1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate installed conditions for:

1. Major raceway systems, size, and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. PVC Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 40, PVC, plain ends.

B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

B. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTICAL 26 0500 - 5ARCHITECTURE

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

D. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

E. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTICAL 26 0500 - 6ARCHITECTURE

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of cable tray, fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 DEMOLITION

A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality at no cost to the owner.

B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety.

C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish.

D. Remove demolished material from Project site.

E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation.

F. Contractor shall remove lamps and ballasts from the existing light fixtures and dispose them in the owner furnished containers.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

C. Repair conduit and system that have been disturbed or broken, see 3.6B.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTICAL 26 0500 - 7ARCHITECTURE

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:1. Raceways.2. Building wire and connectors.3. Supporting devices for electrical components.4. Electrical identification.5. Electricity-metering components.6. Concrete bases.7. Electrical demolition.8. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.9. Touchup painting.

3.8 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."

3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTICAL 26 0500 - 8ARCHITECTURE

BLANK PAGE

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 0519 - 1 ARCHITECTURE

SECTION 26 0519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals for cables.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

C. NFPA: National Fire Prevention Association

D. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

E. NEMA: National electrical Manufacturers Association

F. NETA: National Educational Telecommunications Association

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 0519 - 2 ARCHITECTURE

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 4. Southwire Company.

B. Refer to Part 3 “Conductor Insulation and Multiconductor Cable Applications and Wiring Methods” Article for insulation type, cable construction and ratings.

C. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

D. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5 stranded conductor. Aluminum conductors are allowed on this project.

E. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 5.

F. Minimum Conductor Size (power conductors): #12 AWG

G. MC-Cable or Romex cables shall not be used in this project.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M; Electrical Products Division. 5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

C. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings.

D. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5 stranded conductor. Aluminum conductors are not allowed on this project.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 0519 - 3 ARCHITECTURE

E. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 5.

F. Minimum Conductor Size (power conductors): #12 AWG.

2.3 SLEEVES FOR CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.138-inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

2.4 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex Co. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: As required for the specified materials interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

C. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates

to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 0519 - 4 ARCHITECTURE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Stranded for all conductor sizes, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Provide solid conductors for power and lighting circuits no. 10 AWG and smaller. Provide stranded conductors for sizes no. 8 AWG and larger. All control conductors shall be THHN/THWN stranded in raceway. Motor loads shall be stranded copper..

C. Aluminum conductors are not allowed on this project.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway .

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

G. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

I. Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in single raceway, unless specified otherwise in Section 28, ”Digital, Addressable Fire Alarm System”.

J. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

K. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 0519 - 5 ARCHITECTURE

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

G. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

H. Clean conduits with a 95% mandrel, prior to installation of conductors.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.

3.5 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

C. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both wall surfaces. (Public Areas)

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. (Utility Areas)

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 0519 - 6 ARCHITECTURE

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint according to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

3.6 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground exterior-wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for cable material and size. Position cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors, and conductors feeding the following critical equipment and services for compliance with requirements.

2. Prior to energizing, check installed wires and cables with megaohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled.

3. Provide written documents for all Megger testing.

4. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 0519 - 7 ARCHITECTURE

5. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTS ACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATION USU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 26 0519 - 8 ARCHITECTURE

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1ARCHITECTURE

SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING AND BONDINGFOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

B. Comply with NFPA 70; for medium-voltage underground construction, comply with IEEE C2.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:a. Chance/Hubbell.b. Copperweld Corp.c. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.d. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical.e. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.f. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.g. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.h. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries.i. Lyncole XIT Grounding.j. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.k. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.l. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.

2.2 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 2ARCHITECTURE

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Stranded for all conductor sizes, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

C. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.

E. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.3. Connections to Structural Steel: Non Reversible Crimp.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.2. Lighting circuits.3. Receptacle circuits.4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.6. Flexible raceway runs.7. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment

grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power panels and power-distribution units.

D. Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment-grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units.

E. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment-grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.

F. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment-grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 3ARCHITECTURE

G. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate equipment-grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing, and antifrost heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

H. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

B. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

D. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 4ARCHITECTURE

BLANK PAGE

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 1ARCHITECTURE

SECTION 26 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.2. Construction requirements for concrete bases.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Vibration And Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems" for products and installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 2ARCHITECTURE

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.c. ERICO International Corporation.d. GS Metals Corp.e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating

applied according to MFMA-4.4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-

4.5. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 3ARCHITECTURE

1) Hilti Inc.2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.3) MKT Fastening, LLC.4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 3/8 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 3/4inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 4ARCHITECTURE

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock

washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

F. Support structure width shall be 24 inches (min), unless specified otherwise.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 5ARCHITECTURE

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 6ARCHITECTURE

BLANK PAGE

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 1ARCHITECTURE

SECTION 26 0533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

E. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

F. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

G. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

H. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

I. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 2ARCHITECTURE

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Alflex Inc.3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.5. Electri-Flex Co.6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.7. Maverick Tube Corporation.8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.9. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

D. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.

1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.

E. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

F. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

H. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed.

1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.2. Fittings for EMT:

a. Steel, set-screw type in interior/dry locations. b. Utilize steel, compression type in damp or exterior locations.

3. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

I. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 3ARCHITECTURE

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.2. Hoffman.3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type or As indicated.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

F. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

2.3 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect/Engineer.1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.b. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.2. EGS/Appleton Electric.3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.4. Hoffman.5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. Division.6. O-Z/Gedney; a unit of General Signal.7. RACO; a Hubbell Company.8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet Division.10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 4ARCHITECTURE

D. Metal Floor Boxes: Cast or sheet metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.

2.5 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum 0.138” thickness as indicated and of length to suit application.

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

2.6 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.2. Calpico, Inc.3. Metraflex Co.4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates

to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Comply with the following indoor applications, unless otherwise indicated:1. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.2. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.3. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 5ARCHITECTURE

5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit or IMC.7. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental

Air: Plenum-type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway or EMT.8. Raceways for Optical Fiber or Communications Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser-

type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway or EMT.9. Raceways for Concealed General Purpose Distribution of Optical Fiber or

Communications Cable: Plenum-type, optical fiber/communications cable raceway or EMT.

10. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel in damp or wet locations.

B. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aluminum conduits are not permitted on project.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Keep raceways at least 12 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

C. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

D. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

E. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

F. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

G. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow the surface contours as much as practical.

J. Run exposed, parallel, or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory long sweep on medium voltage elbows may be used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel. This requires raceways be o fht esame size. In other cases provide field bends for parallel raceways.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 6ARCHITECTURE

K. Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which no more than two 90-degree bends are allowed.

L. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and below floors, unless otherwise indicated.

M. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

N. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

O. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.1. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to

above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 100 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. Follow the ANSI/TA/EIA-569-B standards. Conduit to end withing 12 inches of cable tray with a bend toward IDF room. Provide throat type or equal type plastic bushing.

P. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; LFMC may be used 6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.

Q. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

R. Expansion-Joint Fittings for RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30 deg F, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet.

1. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations, and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125

deg F temperature change.d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.

2. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 7ARCHITECTURE

3. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

S. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

T. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall.

U. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.

V. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

W. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

X. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.

Y. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

Z. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.

AA. Run a 95% mandril through each conduit, prior to the installation of conductors.

3.3 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness:

1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

F. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533 - 8ARCHITECTURE

G. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

H. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway unless sleeve seal is to be installed or unless seismic criteria require different clearance.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies.

J. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

K. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway penetrations. Install sleeves and seal with firestop materials. Comply with Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

L. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways with flexible, boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

3.4 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 26 0548 - 1ARCHITECTURE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

SECTION 26 0548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLSFOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Isolation pads.2. Spring isolators.3. Restrained spring isolators.4. Channel support systems.5. Restraint cables.6. Hanger rod stiffeners.7. Anchorage bushings and washers.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 26 Section "Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical supports and installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: Coordinate with structural documents.2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: III.

a. Component Importance Factor: Per Structural requirement..b. Component Response Modification Factor: Per Structural requirement..c. Component Amplification Factor Per Structural requirement..

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): .4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 26 0548 - 2ARCHITECTURE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structural system and architectural features, and with mechanical, fire-protection, electrical, and other building features in the vicinity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.2. California Dynamics Corporation.3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.4. Hilti Inc.5. Loos & Co.; Seismic Earthquake Division.6. Mason Industries.7. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and application requirements shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 26 0548 - 3ARCHITECTURE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod. Do not weld stiffeners to rods.

F. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchors and studs.

G. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices.

H. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

I. Mechanical Anchor: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchors with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

J. Adhesive Anchor: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.2 ANCHORAGE AND STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Coordinate products in this Article with structural engineer and with Drawings.

B. Strength: Defined in reports by ICBO Evaluation Service or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components used shall be at

least two times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Concrete and Masonry Anchor Bolts and Studs: Steel-expansion wedge type.

D. Concrete Inserts: Steel-channel type.

E. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

F. Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS SP-69, Type 57.

G. Beam Clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided. Single-sided type is not acceptable.

H. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of anchor bolts and studs used.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 26 0548 - 4ARCHITECTURE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

I. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of attachment devices used.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings.2. All hardware shall be galvanized. 3. Hot-dipped galvanize metal components for exterior use.4. Corrosive Locations: Stainless Steel.5. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.6. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to indicate

capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 26 0548 - 5ARCHITECTURE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1. Install restrained isolators on electrical equipment.2. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service

member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component.

B. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

C. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

D. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ANCHORAGE

A. Anchor rigidly to a single mobile structural element or to a concrete base that is structurally tied to a single mobile structural element.

B. Anchor panelboards, motor-control centers, motor controls, switchboards, switchgear, transformers, fused power-circuit devices, transfer switches, busways, battery racks, static uninterruptible power units, power conditioners, capacitor units, communication system components, and electronic signal processing, control, and distribution units as follows:1. Size concrete bases so expansion anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from

the edge of the concrete base.2. Concrete Bases for Floor-Mounted Equipment: Use female expansion anchors and

install studs and nuts after equipment is positioned.3. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Install to allow for resilient media

between anchor bolt or stud and mounting hole in concrete.4. Anchor Bolt Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment: Install to allow for

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.5. Torque bolts and nuts on studs to values recommended by equipment manufacturer.

C. STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 26 0548 - 6ARCHITECTURE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

1. Use bolted connections with steel brackets, slotted channel, and slotted-channel fittings to spread structural loads and reduce stresses.

2. Attachments to New Concrete: Bolt to channel-type concrete inserts or use expansion anchors.

3. Attachments to Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchors.4. Holes for Expansion Anchors in Concrete: Drill at locations and to depths that avoid

reinforcing bars.5. Attachments to Solid Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Use expansion anchors.6. Attachments to Hollow Walls: Bolt to slotted steel channels fastened to wall with

expansion anchors.7. Attachments to Wood Structural Members: Install bolts through members.8. Attachments to Steel: Bolt to clamps on flanges of beams or on upper truss chords of bar

joists.

3.5 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Testing: Test pull-out resistance of seismic anchorage devices.1. Provide necessary test equipment required for reliable testing.2. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable

to authorities having jurisdiction.3. Retain subparagraphs below with any paragraph selected above.4. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to

restrained component (unless post-connection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

5. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to the structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

6. Edit sampling frequency in subparagraph below to suit Project.7. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by

Architect.8. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.9. If a device fails the test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.10. Record test results.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after isolated equipment is at operating weight.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 26 0548 - 7ARCHITECTURE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.8 ELECTRICAL VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE

A. Supported or Suspended Equipment:

1. Equipment Location: as required.2. Pads:

a. Material: Neoprene.b. Thickness: ¼ inches.

3. Isolator Type: As designated in Part 2.4. Component Importance Factor: Per Structural requirement..5. Component Response Modifiction Factor: Per Structural requirement..6. Component Amplification Factor: Per Structural requirement..

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS 26 0548 - 8ARCHITECTURE FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

BLANK PAGE

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 1ARCHITECTURE

SECTION 26 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Identification for raceways.2. Identification of power and control cables.3. Identification for conductors.4. Warning labels and signs.5. Instruction signs.6. Equipment identification labels.7. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less (see 3.1F):

1. Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 2ARCHITECTURE

2.2 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. Conductors in sizes #6 and below shall be color coded with the colored insulation. Larger sizes may be identified with colored tape.

2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR:"a. Working Voltage 208V: 36 inches.b. Working Voltage 480V: 48 inches.c. Working Voltage 4160V: 60 inches.d. Working Voltage 12,470V: 10 feet.e. Working Voltage 46,000V: 10 feet.

2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

2.6 CABLE TIES

A. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.5. Color: Black.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 3ARCHITECTURE

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

F. Color Banding Raceways and Exposed Cables: Band exposed and accessible raceways of the systems listed below:1. Bands: Pretensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or a

combination of both. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.

2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.

3. Apply the following colors to the systems listed below:

a. Fire-Alarm System: Red.b. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow.c. Combined Fire-Alarm and Security System: Red and blued. Security System: Purplee. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.f. Telecommunications System: Blueg. Emergency power system: Yellow.h. 277/480 volts system: Brown.i. 120/208 volts system: Black.j. Clocks & Bells: Orange.k. Sound System: Green.l. Traveler (switch to light or switch to switch) 120 volts: Pinkm. Traveler (switch to light or switch to switch) 277 volts: Purplen. Lighting control and dimmers systems: White.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 4ARCHITECTURE

G. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

H. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

I. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

J. Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Install labels externally.1. Exposed Boxes: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover.2. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card-stock tags.3. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or

equivalent.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with color conduit. Install labels at 10-foot maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power.2. Power.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG.b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.4) Neutral : White5) Ground : Green6) Isolated Ground: White & Green7) Control: Violet

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:1) Phase A: Brown.2) Phase B: Orange.3) Phase C: Yellow.4) Neutral : Gray5) Ground : Green6) Isolated Ground: White & Green

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 5ARCHITECTURE

7) Control: Violet

d. Fire Alarm-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and junction boxes and enclosures, use factory colored cables and conductors to identify the individual circuits. All conductors shall be stranded.

D. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following field-applied, color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG:

a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch- wide tape in colors specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification markings.

b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal and spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten to a snug fit, and cut off excess length.

E. Apply identification to conductors as follows:1. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers.2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with

source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color-coding to identify circuits' voltage and phase.

3. Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent system of tags, color-coding, or cable marking tape.

F. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows:1. Warnings, Cautions, and Instructions: Install to ensure safe operation and maintenance

of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

2. Emergency Operation: Install engraved laminated signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch- high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.

G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.

H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 6ARCHITECTURE

I. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

c. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.c. Enclosed switches.d. Enclosed circuit breakers.e. Enclosed controllers.f. Contactors.g. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.h. Disconnect switches.i. Enclosed circuit breakers.j. Control devices.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 1ARCHITECTURE

SECTION 26 2416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Distribution panelboards.2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.

B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 2ARCHITECTURE

6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.

7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

C. Qualification Data.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 3ARCHITECTURE

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F.b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spare for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 4ARCHITECTURE

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:1. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.2. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.3. General Electric.4. Cutler-Hammer.

D. Enclosures: Flush- and surface As specified on the drawings -mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.c. Kitchen or Wash-Down Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.e. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover.

4. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.

5. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

E. Incoming Mains Location: As required.

F. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

G. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 5ARCHITECTURE

2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type.3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.4. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate

at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.

Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.

H. Service Equipment Label: UL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

I. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

2.2 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING

A. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals. 1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for

series-connected system with integral or remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an UL. Include size and type of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit rating by an UL.

2.3 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

B. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs as shown.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

B. Mains: As specified on the drawings.

C. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

D. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 6ARCHITECTURE

2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:a. Instantaneous trip.b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault protection (30-mA trip).

7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V, single-pole configuration.

8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Communication Capability: Integral communication module with functions and features compatible with power monitoring and control system specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."

f. Shunt Trip: 120 V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.

g. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with field-adjustable 0.1- to 0.6-second time delay.

h. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

i. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit breaker trips.

j. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.

k. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices.

l. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 7ARCHITECTURE

m. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in on or off position.

n. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.

B. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.

1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles.3. Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open and normally closed contact(s) that operate with

switch handle operation.

2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Equipment Mounting: Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfraces, ensuring tha they are permanently and mechanically anchored.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Mount top of trim 74 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 8ARCHITECTURE

F. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

I. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future.

J. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

K. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section “Grounding and Bonding for Electrical System”.

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section “Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables”.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 9ARCHITECTURE

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 10ARCHITECTURE

BLANK PAGE

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 1ARCHITECTURE

SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.2. Twist-locking receptacles.3. Receptacles with integral surge suppression units.4. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.5. Wall-switch.6. Pendant cord-connector devices.7. Cord and plug sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.

D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.

F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Provide a sample of each type of device to be used.

B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 2ARCHITECTURE

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.

1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A decorated style: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), DR20 (duplex).b. Leviton; 16352 (duplex).c. Pass & Seymour; 26352 (duplex).

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 3ARCHITECTURE

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A decorated style:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; GF20.b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.

2.4 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: Stainless steel.3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel.4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and

labeled for use in "wet locations."

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: 1. NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable

cover.2. NEMA 3R-in-Use cover, plastic, weather resistant.

2.5 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.

C. Service Plate: Rectangular die-cast aluminum with satin finish.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening.

2.6 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.2. Wiremold Company (The).

B. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

C. Raceway Material: Metal, with standard finish.

D. Wire: No. 12 AWG.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 4ARCHITECTURE

2.7 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Gray, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.3. TVSS Devices: Blue.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the

manufacturer.7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice

No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 5ARCHITECTURE

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout

or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the

circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 6ARCHITECTURE

BLANK PAGE

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 1ARCHITECTURE

SECTION 26 2816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Fusible switches.2. Nonfusible switches.3. Receptacle switches.4. Shunt trip switches.5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).6. Molded-case switches.7. Enclosures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NC: Normally closed.

B. NO: Normally open.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Current and voltage ratings.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 2ARCHITECTURE

3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate).4. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices.5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components.6. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Field quality-control reports.

1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 3ARCHITECTURE

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:1. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.2. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.3. General Electric Company.4. Cuttler-Hammer.

B. Provide fusible switches with quantity of poles and amperage, as indicated on the drawings.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, [600]-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 4ARCHITECTURE

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.

5. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

6. Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.7. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.8. Labeled for use as service equipment.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:1. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.2. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Provide fusible switches with quantity of poles and amperage, as indicated on the drawings.

C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

D. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

3. Mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: Two NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate before switch blades open.

5. Allows use of a hookstick to operate the handle.6. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.

2.3 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:1. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.2. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.3. General Electric Company.4. Cuttler-Hammer

B. Show pole quantities and voltage and ampere ratings of MCCBs and switches on Drawings.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 5ARCHITECTURE

C. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply with available fault currents.

D. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

E. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

F. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following field-adjustable settings:

1. Instantaneous trip.2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

G. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting circuits.

4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.5. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.6. Alarm Switch: One NO/NC contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.

2.4 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:1. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.2. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.3. General Electric Company.4. Cuttler-Hammer

B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.

C. Features and Accessories:

1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles.2. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor material.3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with

mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence current transformer/sensor.

4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.5. Auxiliary Contacts: Two SPDT switches with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic

switch contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 6ARCHITECTURE

6. One NO/NC contact that operates only when switch has tripped.7. Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be removable only when switch

is in off position.8. Integral with ground-fault shunt trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault protection function.9. Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R3. NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in fusible devices.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 7ARCHITECTURE

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study".

END OF SECTION

USU CAINE COLLEGE OF THE ARTSACADEMIC ADVISING CENTER RENOVATIONUSU PROJECT NO. CP001046

SPARANO + MOONEY ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816 - 8ARCHITECTURE

BLANK PAGE